Download Sharp ARFX13 - Fax Interface Card Service manual

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZAR203E/S2E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM/DIGITAL COPIER
MODEL
AR-203E
AR-203E X
AR-M200
AR-M201
AR-5420
(The descriptions of the AR-203E X are same as
those of the AR-203E unless otherwise specified.)
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used
for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and
IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls,
adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved
on the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of
servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a
unit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner
cartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected
when removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.
Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,
WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 770 ~ 795nm
Pulse times : 12.88µs ± 12.88ns/7mm
Out put power : MAX 0.2mW
VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄ
KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅR
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF
FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR
STRÅLNING.
VARNING !
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL
ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄR
FARLIG.
At the production line, the output power
of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.18
MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is
maintained constant by the operation of
the Automatic Power Control (APC).
Even if the APC circuit fails in operation
for some reason, the maximum output
power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1
MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible
emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT
which is still-less than the limit of
CLASS-1 laser product.
Caution
This product contains a low power laser
device. To ensure continued safety do not
remove any cover or attempt to gain access
to the inside of the product. Refer all
servicing to qualified personnel.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA
KUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLE
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT
SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS
FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V
model, 230V model and 240V model.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CONTENTS
[1]
[2]
[3]
GENERAL
[7]
1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SPECIFICATIONS
2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
2. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
3. Copy performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
C. Drive system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
4. GDI printer (AR-203E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
B. Laser beam path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
CONSUMABLE PARTS
4. Fuser section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201),
SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . 7-4
B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . 7-4
C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/
document transport (Duplex model)
(AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
D. SRH (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . 3-2
B. Front copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
4. Toner cartridge replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
[4]
2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
A. AR-203E/5420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
B. AR-M200/M201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4. Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Checking packed components and accessories. . . . . . 5-1
4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6. Developer unit installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
7. Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
8. Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
9. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
B. Installing the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
C. Setting up Button Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
12. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
[6]
C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5]
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
[8]
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
B. Drum replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
C. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
D. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
E. Charger wire cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
F. Charger wire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
D. Pressure plate holder attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
COPY PROCESS
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
3. Actual print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
8
Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . 13-1
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . 13-2
9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
2. Actual wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
B. DV seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
C. DV blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . 13-5
E. DV sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
E. 2nd cassette unit
(AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
[9]
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
F. Network box and FAX
(AR-M200/M201 optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
3. Signal name list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only). . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
4. Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . 9-4
D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
A. Main charger (Grid bias). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
4. Duplex adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory
for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode
(AR-M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
5. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Key rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
3. List of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
4. Descriptions of various simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
5. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Maintenance display system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] USER PROGRAM
1. Functions that can be set with user programs . . . . . . 12-1
2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
3. User programs (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
4. User programs (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . 13-38
[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES
1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . 14-1
2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item
CPM
(A4)
PPM
(A4)
Model
AR-203E 20CPM 15PPM
SB/
MB
MB
2 Tray SPF R-SPF
Opt
Color
GDI SPLC
EDuplex Shifter
Scanner printer printer SORT
✕
Opt
—
AR-5420 20CPM
AR-M200 20CPM 20PPM
MB
MB
✕
Opt
✕
✕
✕
Opt
AR-M201 20CPM 20PPM
MB
Opt
✕
Opt
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
USB
✕
✕
(2.0 full)
✕
RJ45
FAX
External
NIC
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Opt
✕
Opt
✕
Opt
Opt
(2.0 Hi)
✕
(2.0 Hi)
Descriptions of items
CPM:
Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)
PPM:
Print speed (Print Per Minute)
SB/MB:
SB = Manual feed single bypass,
MB = Manual feed multi-bypass
2 Tray:
Second cassette unit (AR-D33)
SPF:
Original feed unit (AR-SP9)
R-SPF:
Duplex original feed unit (AR-RP9)
Color Scanner:
Color scanner function
GDI printer:
GDI printer function with USB.
SPLC printer:
SPLC printer function with USB.
E-SORT:
Electronic sort function
Duplex:
Auto duplex copy/print function
Shifter:
Job separator function
USB:
Interface port (USB)
RJ45:
Interface port (Network)
FAX:
FAX function (AR-FX13)
External NIC:
AR-NB2A
AR-203E/AR-5420
AR-M200/AR-M201
(Options)
AR-RP9
AR-D33
Descriptions of table
:
Standard provision
:
No function or no option available
Opt: Option
AR-SP9
AR-NB2A
AR-FX13
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 GENERAL 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specifications
Item
Type
Copy system
Segment (class)
Copier dimensions
Weight (Approximately)
Desktop
Dry, electrostatic
Digital personal copier
AR-203E/5420: 518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-5/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H))
AR-M200/M201: 518mm (W) x 452mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-7/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H))
AR-203E/5420: 16.6kg (36.5 lbs.) Toner cartridge not included
AR-M200: 19.8kg (43.7 lbs.)
AR-M201: 20.5kg (45.2 lbs.)
2. Operation specifications
Paper feed
section
Section, item
Paper feed system
AB system Tray paper feed section
Multi-bypass paper
feed section
Inch
system
Tray paper feed section
Multi-bypass paper
feed section
Details
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper exit section
Originals
Optical
section
Scanning
section
Exit way
Capacity of output tray
Original set
Max. original size
Original kinds
Original size detection
Scanning system
CCD sensor
Lighting lamp
Resolution
Type
Voltage
Power consumption
Output data
Writing
section
Image forming
Writing system
Laser unit
Photoconductor
Charger
Developing
Cleaning
Resolution
Type
Life
Charging system
Transfer system
Separation system
Developing system
Cleaning system
1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets)
A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
56 - 80g/m2
250 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
User adjustment of paper guide available
A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape)
56 - 128g/m2
50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
User adjustment of paper guide available
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)
15 - 21 lbs.
250 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
User adjustment of paper guide available
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2"
(Landscape)
15 - 34.5 lbs.
50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
User adjustment of paper guide available
Face down
200 sheets
Center Registration (left edge)
A4 (8-1/2" x 14")
sheet, book
None
3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp
600 dpi
CCFL
560Vrms
2.8W
Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits
actual)
Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser
600 dpi
OPC (30ø)
25K
Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge
(+) DC corotron system
(-) DC corotron system
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
Fusing section
Electrical section
Section, item
Fusing system
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Heater lamp
Details
Power source
Power consumption
Type
Type
Type
Voltage
Power consumption
Voltage
Frequency
Max.
Average (during copying)
Average (stand-by)
Pre-heat mode
Auto power shut-off mode
Heat roller system
Teflon roller
Silicon rubber roller
Halogen lamp
220 - 240V / 120V
800W
220 - 240V / 120V
Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Less than 1000W
AR-203E/5420: 350Wh/H or less
AR-M200/ M201: 380Wh/H or less
80Wh/H
AR-203E/5420: 25Wh/H or less
AR-M200/ M201: 28Wh/H or less
AR-203E/5420: 8.8W or less
AR-M200/ M201: 12.5W or less
3. Copy performance
Section, item
Copy magnification
Fixed
magnification
ratios
Details
AR-203E/5420:
3 Reduction + 2 Enlargement
(AB system: 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200%)
(Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%)
AR-M200/M201: *1
4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement
(AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%)
(Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%)
25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments)
50 - 200% when using SPF (151 steps in 1% increments)
Zooming
magnification
ratios
Manual steps (manual, photo)
Copy speed
First-copy time *2
(Approximately)
AB system
A4 (Landscape)
Copy speed
(CPM)
AB system
B5 (Landscape)
Copy speed
(CPM)
Inch system
8-1/2" x 11"
(Landscape)
Copy speed
(CPM)
Max. continuous copy quantity
Void
Void area
Image loss
Warm-up time
Power save mode reset time
Paper jam recovery time
Same size
Enlargement
Reduction
Same size
Enlargement
Reduction
Same size
Enlargement
Reduction
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Side edge
void area
Leading edge
5 steps
AR-203E/5420:
8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF)
10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON)
AR-M200/M201:
8.0 seconds
(paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100%)
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
99
1 - 4mm
4mm or less
0.5mm or more (per side)
4.5mm or less (total of both sides)
same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (SPF)
Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (SPF)
Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (SPF)
0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
0 sec.
∗ Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open.
*1: If a value greater than 200% or smaller than 50% is selected when the RSPF is used, the magnification ratio is automatically set to 200% or
50%.
*2: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), paper fed from paper tray).
The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2
4. GDI printer (AR-203E only)
Print speed
Max. 15ppm (excluding bypass tray, paper size A4, 8.5" x 11") (Variable depending on the PC performance)
Duplex
No
Memory
8MB
Interface
USB 2.0 (Full speed)
Emulation
GDI
Resolution
600dpi *1
Supported OS
Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista
WHQL support
Yes *2
*1: Engine Resolution
*2: By running change
5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201)
Print speed
Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed)
∗ Varies depending on the PC performance.
First print time
8 sec. (without data transfer time)
Duplex
Yes (AR-M201 only)
ROPM
Yes
Memory
64MB
Interface
USB2.0 (Hi Speed)
Network
Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A
Emulation
SPLC (JBIG GDI)
MIB support
No
Resolution
600dpi *1
Supported OS
Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista
WHQL support
Yes *2
Application
Status window
*1: Engine Resolution
*2: Running change
6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201)
Type
Flat Bed Color Scanner
Scanning system
Original table/SPF/RSPF
Light source
3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL)
Resolution
Optical: 600 x 1200dpi
Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)
Originals
Sheet type / Book type
Output data
R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel
Scan range
OC/SPF/RSPF: 216mm (H) x 356mm (V) (8.5" (H) x 14.0" (V))
Original position: Left Center
SPF/RSPF position: Right Center
A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual)
Scan speed
OC/SPF: Max. 2.88ms/line
Protocol
TWAIN / WIA (Only XP, Vista) / STI
Interface
AR-203E: USB2.0 (Full speed support)
AR-M200/M201: USB2.0 (Hi speed support)
Scanner utility
Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer
Scan key/lamp
Yes
Duplex scan
Yes only when the RSPF is installed (AR-M200/M201)
Supported OS
Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista
Void area
No
WHQL supported
Yes *1
*1: By running change
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201), SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201)
No.
1
Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)
Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag
× 10
× 10
2
Developer
Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)
× 10
3
Drum kit
Drum
Drum fixing plate
×1
×1
Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)
Product name
AR-208LT
(A4 6% document)
250K
(25K x 10Pcs)
AR-208LD
25K
AR-152DM
Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)
Product name
AR-208CT
(A4 6% document)
250K
(25K x 10Pcs)
AR-208CD
25K
AR-152DR
Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)
Product name
AR-208ET
(A4 6% document)
250K
(25K x 10Pcs)
AR-208CD
25K
AR-152DR
Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)
Product name
AR-208CT-C
(A4 6% document)
250K
(25K x 10Pcs)
AR-208CD-C
25K
AR-152DR-C
Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208LT includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208LD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DM.
B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201)
No.
1
Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)
Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag
× 10
× 10
2
Developer
Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)
× 10
3
Drum kit
Drum
Drum fixing plate
×1
×1
Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208CT includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208CD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR.
C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201)
No.
1
Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)
Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag
× 10
× 10
2
Developer
Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)
× 10
3
Drum kit
Drum
Drum fixing plate
×1
×1
Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208ET includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208CD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR.
D. SRH (AR-203E/M201)
No.
1
Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)
Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag
× 10
× 10
2
Developer
Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)
× 10
3
Drum kit
Drum
Drum fixing plate
×1
×1
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208CT-C includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208CD-C includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR-C.
2. Environmental
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the
machine operations are as follows:
(1)
3. Production control number (lot No.)
identification
<Toner cartridge>
Normal operating condition
Temperature: 20 - 25°C
Production month
Production day
Destination code
Humidity: 65 ± 5%RH
(2)
Acceptable operating condition
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
<Drum cartridge>
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.
(SOCC production)
20%
10˚C
30˚C
Production month
Production day
Destination code
35˚C
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
(3) Transport condition
Humidity (RH)
90%
Version No.
60%
15%
–25˚C
(4)
30˚C
40˚C
Supply storage condition
Humidity (RH)
90%
Production control
label attachment position
20%
–5˚C
45˚C
Production control
label attachment position(*1)
*1: The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of
a China product.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2
<Developer>
Sub lot
Production day
Production month
End digit of year
Production place
4. Toner cartridge replacement
1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier.
2) Keep holding Toner lever, and
3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.
2
3
1
4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it
from the copier
Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 3
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance
Interface
Interface
1
USB connector
(AR-203E)
USB connector
(AR-M200/M201)
2
3
7
10
11
8
9
4
5
12
13
14
6
1
4
7
10
13
Original cover
Front cover
Side cover
Paper output tray
Handle
2
5
8
11
14
Document glass
Paper tray
Side cover open button
Paper output tray extension
Power cord
3
6
9
12
Operation panel
Multi-bypass tray
Bypass tray paper guides
Power switch
2. Internal
Toner cartridge
Drum cartridge
2
3
1
4
5
1
4
Front cover
Transfer charger
2
5
Side cover
Charger cleaner
3
Fusing unit release lever
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1
3. Operation panel
A. AR-203E/5420
1
2
3
4 5
6
13 14
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
Exposure mode selector key and indicators
Use to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO,
MANUAL or PHOTO.
Selected mode is shown by a lit indicator.
Alarm indicators
Developer replacement required indicator
Misfeed indicator
Toner cartridge replacement required indicator *1
Maintenance indicator
SPF misfeed indicator (AR-203E only)
Copy ratio display (%) key
• Use to verify a zoom setting without changing the zoom ratio.
• Use to check the number of originals that must be returned to
the document feeder tray if an original misfeed occurs while
using the SPF.
SCAN key and indicator (AR-203E only) *2, *3
Start key and indicator
• Copying is possible when the indicator is on.
• Press to start copying
• Use to set a user program.
Tray select key
Use to select a paper feed station (paper tray or multi-bypass
tray).
ZOOM keys and indicator
Use to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio from 25%
to 400% in 1% increments. (When the SPF is being used, the
zoom copy ratio range is 50% to 200%.)
Clear key
• Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run to
terminate copying.
• Press and hold down during standby to display the total
number of copies made to date.
*1: Toner cartridge replacement
8
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
9
16
10
11
12
17
Light and dark keys and indicators
Use to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level. Selected
exposure level is shown by a lit indicator. Use to start and
terminate user program setting.
SPF indicator (AR-203E only)
Copy ratio selector key and indicators
Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement copy
ratios.
Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator.
Display
Displays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, user
program code, and error code.
ONLINE key and indicator (AR-203E only)
Lights up when the unit is used as a printer and scanner. *2
Power save indicator
Lights up when the unit is in a power save mode.
14
Paper feed location indicators
Light up to show the selected paper feed station.
16
Copy quantity keys
• Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
• Use to make user program entries.
Start indicator
When toner density is lower than a specified level, the toner
cartridge replacement indicator lights up to warn the user. If the
toner cartridge is not replaced in that time, the ready lamp
changes to blinking and then start to supply the toner after
around 10 copies. (Cartridge replacement lamp continues to
light.) If toner density is not back to specific level after two minutes, the ready indicator goes out and toner developer indicator
starts blinking, and the copier stops. Also when the toner quantity is insufficient, the lamp is lighted.
*2: Indicators on the operation panel
The ONLINE indicator and the start (
state of the printer or scanner.
SCAN indicator
ONLINE indicator
7
) indicator indicate the
Start indicator
Power save indicator
On:
Indicates the unit is ready for copying or scanning is
being performed.
Blinking: The indicator blinks in the following situations:
• When a print job is interrupted.
• When reserving a copy job.
• When toner is being replenished during a copy or
print job.
Off:
The indicator is off in the following situations:
• During copying or scanning.
• The unit is in the auto power shut-off mode.
• When a misfeed or error has occurred.
ONLINE indicator
The ONLINE key is pressed and on line and off line are
changed.
On:
Indicates the unit is ready for printing or scanning is
being performed. (On line)
Blinking: Printing or data is being received from a computer.
Off:
Copying is being performed. (Off line)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2
Power save indicator
2) Place the original you wish to scan on the document glass/
SPF.
On:
Indicates the unit is in a power save mode.
Blinking: Indicates that the unit is initializing (when the side
cover is opened and closed or the power turned off
and on).
3) Press the right copy quantity key to display the number of
the application that you wish to use for scanning.
The application numbers are initially as follows.
SCAN indicator
On:
The SCAN (
) key has been pressed and the unit
is in scanner mode.
Blinking: A scan job is being executed from the computer, or
scan data is stored in the unit’s memory.
Off:
The unit is in the copy mode.
*3: Using the SCAN key to begin scanning
Application
number
SC2
Note:
• Scanning is not possible during a copy job.
• If the SCAN (
) key is pressed during a print job, the scan
job will be stored.
SC3
SC4
SC5
SC6
• When scanning an original that has been placed in the SPF,
only one original can be placed unless you are using Sharpdesk.
1) Press the SCAN (
) key.
Application launched
E-mail (your standard e-mail program in
the Windows OS you are using)
Fax (if a fax program is installed)
OCR (if an OCR program is installed)
Microsoft Word (if installed)
Filing (if a Filing program is installed)
4) Press the start (
The unit enters scan mode.
) key.
Scanning will start and the scanned data will be transferred
to the application.
B. AR-M200/M201
For Europe
1
2
3
4
5
Display
1
2
2
1
2
1
READY TO COPY.
100%
A4
2
18
6 7
8 9 10 11
0
1
12 13 14
15
16
19
20
21
17
For SCA/SCNZ/Asia
1
3
2
4
5
Display
READY TO COPY.
100%
A4
18
6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
15
16
17
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3
19
0
20
21
1
[MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators
Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected
mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax indicators).
2
3
Numeric keys
Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical
settings.
4
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
The keys can also be used to select items in function setting
menus.
Power save indicator
This lights up when the power save function is activated.
Error indicator
This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error
occurs.
Tray location indicator
Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the
tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly.
[2-SIDED SCAN] key (
)
[2-SIDED COPY] key (
)
Press to select the automatic two-sided copying mode.
[
] key (
), [
] key (
), [OK]/[ENTER] key
Press the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to select an item in
a function setting menu.
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
21
8
10
12
1
Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key to enter a selection.
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key
Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio.
To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY
RATIO] key and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio
that is not preset, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key, select
the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press
the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to increase or decrease
the ratio in increments of 1%.
[START] key (
) / Ready indicator
The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is
possible.
To begin copying, press the [START] key (
19
6
14
Display
This shows messages indicating the machine status and any
problems that occur, as well as user programs and function
setting menus.
[CLEAR] key (
)
Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a
job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this
key to move back to the previous menu level.
RSPF indicator
This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF.
[TRAY SELECT] key (
)
Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for
copying.
[MENU] key
Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a
user program or to display the total count.
[E-SORT/SP.FUNC] key (
)
Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin
shift function.
[EXPOSURE] key (
)
Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or
photo mode.
16
[CLEAR ALL] key (
)
This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in
a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial
state.
18
Shows the current copy ratio.
20
Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the
numeric keys.
).
The [START] key (
) is also pressed to return to normal
operation from auto power shut-off mode.
Shows the selected paper size.
A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been
changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift
is selected.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4
4. Motors and solenoids
2
4
1
5
9
7
6
8
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part name
Main motor
Scanner motor
Toner motor
Cooling fan motor
Resist roller solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Multi paper feed solenoid
Duplex motor
Shifter motor
Control signal
MM
MRMT
TM
VFM
RRS
CPFS1
MPFS
DMT
SFTM
3
Function / Operation
Drives the copier.
Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
Supplies toner.
Cools the optical, fusing section.
Resist roller rotation control solenoid
Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1
Multi manual pages feed solenoid
Devices the duplex paper transport section (AR-M201 only)
Drives the shifter. (AR-M200/M201)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5
5. Sensors and switches
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
No.
1
Signal
MHPS
Type
Transmission sensor
2
3
4
5
Name
Scanner unit home position
sensor
POD sensor
PPD2 sensor
Cassette detection switch
PD1 sensor (AR-M200/M201)
POD
PPD2
CED1
PD1
Transmission sensor
Transmission sensor
Micro-switch
Micro-switch
6
7
PPD1 sensor
Door switch
PPD1
DSW
Transmission sensor
Micro-switch
Function
Scanner unit home position
detection
Paper exit detection
Paper transport detection 2
Cassette installation detection
Paper width detect
Paper transport detection 1
Door open/close detection
(safety switch for 24V)
Output
"H" at home position
"H" at paper pass
"L" at paper pass
"H" at cassette insertion
"H" at A4 size or less
"L" at A4 size or more
"L" at paper pass
1 or 0V of 24V at door open
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6
6. PWB unit
2
5
11
1
8
9
6
10
4
3
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Name
Exposure lamp invertor PWB
Main PWB (MCU)
Operation PWB
High voltage PWB
CCD sensor PWB
LSU motor PWB
TCS PWB
LSU PWB
FAX-operation PWB
Power PWB
Modem PWB
Function
Exposure lamp (CCFL) control
Copier control
Operation input/display
High voltage control
For image scanning
For polygon motor drive
For toner sensor control
For laser control
FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option)
AC power input, DC voltage control
FAX control (AR-FX13 option)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 7
7. Cross sectional view
1
2
4
3
16
5
15
6
7
8
9
10
14
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Part name
Scanner unit
Exposure lamp
LSU (Laser unit)
Paper exit roller
Shifter roller
Main charger
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Drum
Transfer unit
Pickup roller
Manual paper feed tray
Manual paper feed roller
PS roller unit
Paper feed roller
Paper transport roller
Paper transport roller 2
13
12
11
Function and operation
Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD).
Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original
Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
Roller for paper exit (AR-203E/5420)
Transports and shifts paper in the back-forth direction of the machine. (AR-M200/M201)
Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
Forms images.
Transfers images onto the drum.
Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
Tray for manual feed paper
Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
Transports of a paper.
Transports of a paper. (AR-M200/M201)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 8
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Copier installation
2. Cautions on handling
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place,
condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in
this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.
Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours
before use.
Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any
object.
Do not install your copier in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very dusty
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.
Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality.
• exposed to direct sunlight
• poorly ventilated
Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges
in a dark place without removing from the package before use.
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor
print quality.
• subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near
an air conditioner or heater.
3. Checking packed components and
accessories
Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included.
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for
easy connection.
Operation manual
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
20cm (8")
10cm
(4")
Software CD-ROM
20cm (8")
10cm
(4")
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1
Drum cartridge
(installed in unit)
4. Unpacking
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the unit to unpack the
unit and carry it to the installation location.
2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove
the two protective pins from the fusing unit by pulling the
strings upward one at a time.
Protective pins
CAUTION tape
3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open the cover.
5. Removing protective packing
materials
1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below.
Then open the original cover and remove protective materials.
4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit.
5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer
unit.
6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.
2) Release the scan head locking switch.
The scan head locking switch is under the document glass.
If the switch is locked ( ), the unit will not operate. Unlock the
switch ( ) as shown below.
Grasp here and turn in
the direction of the arrow.
5
1
3
(A)
Lock
Unlock
To lock the scan head locking switch, hold up the catch in illustration (A) and turn the center knob counter-clockwise 90
degrees until you hear a click.
6. Developer unit installation
4
7) Remove the screw (1 pc).
8) Remove Upper developer unit.
1) Open the multi-bypass tray, and then open the side cover.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2
2
9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer.
10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX
roller evenly.
7. Toner cartridge installation
1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit
with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.
2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below,
remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion.
3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.
Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer
unit.
11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw.
12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.
4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier.
5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in
the figure below.
Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction.
Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as
shown with the arrow in the figure below.
(Prevention of splash of developer)
6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.
13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier.
Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be
sure to insert carefully.
14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a
screw.
15) Completion of Developer unit installation
Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter
may drop and Toner unit may drop.
7) Completion of Toner unit installation
Close the front and side cabinets.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3
8. Loading paper
10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201)
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.
The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following
software:
MFP driver
Printer driver
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the
machine.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate
lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing
down the pressure plate of the paper tray.
The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility
that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status,
the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages.
Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when
the machine is used as a network printer.
Scanner driver*
The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the
machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.
Sharpdesk* (Excluding AR-203E X)
3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step
2). To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it on
the relevant location.
Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it
easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications.
Button Manager*
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the
machine to scan a document.
Pressure plate lock
*: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are
connected to the machine by a USB cable.
A. Before installation
Hardware and software requirements
4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper
width and length. Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and
slide the guide to match with the width of the paper. Move
paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.
Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to
install the software.
Computer type
Operating
system*2 *3
Display
Hard disk free
space
Other hardware
requirements
Paper guide (B)
Paper guide (A)
5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the edges
go under the corner hooks.
Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line (
Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
).
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped
with a USB 2.0/1.1*1
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000
Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4,
Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4
1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit
150 MB or more
An environment on which any of the operating
systems listed above can fully operate
*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home
Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly
equipped with a USB port.
*2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.
*3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment.
*4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using
the installer.
Installation environment and usable software
The following table shows the drivers and software that can be
installed for each version of Windows and interface connection
method.
Cable
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the unit.
9. Power to copier
Ensure that the power switch of the unit is in the OFF position.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet. Turn
the power switch on the left side of the unit to the "ON" position.
The start (
) indicator will light up and other indicators which
show the initial settings of the operation panel will also light up to
indicate the ready condition.
USB
Operating
Printer
Scanner Button
Sharpdesk
system
driver
driver Manager
1
Windows 98/ Available*
Available
Me/2000/XP/
Vista
*1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the
type of connection between the machine and your computer.
Install the software according to the Operation Manual.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4
B. Installing the software
8) Click the "MFP Driver" button.
Note:
• The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP.
With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different from those in this manual.
Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
• In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation.
• If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen
to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation
procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may
have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case,
reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem.
1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make
sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If
this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
Note: The cable will be connected in step 13).
2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon.
9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer",
and then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and
then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4) Double-click the "setup" icon.
In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for
confirmation, click "Allow".
5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure
that you understand the contents of the software license, and
then click the "Yes" button.
Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different
language by selecting the desired language from the
language menu. To install the software in the selected
language, continue the installation with that language
selected.
6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then
click the "Next" button.
7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go
to step 12).
To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go
to next step.
Caution:
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button.
If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"
button and go to step 12).
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes"
button to restart your computer.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5
Installing the Utility Software
11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button.
Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the
driver.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution:
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
This completes the installation of the software.
• If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as
explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager".
• If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will
appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.
(1)
Connecting a USB cable
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.
A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not
included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable
for your computer.
Caution:
Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears,
click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation.
If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging.
If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be
installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows.
• USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista preinstalled.
• Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver.
The USB cable should be connected during installation of the
printer driver.
Note
• If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your
computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
• To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0
MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to
"HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM".
(AR-M200/M201 only)
• Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista.
• Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be
possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting
USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a
higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card.
12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button.
Caution:
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer.
However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed).
1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine.
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine
to your computer. Click the "OK" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes"
button to restart your computer.
13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable.
(AR-203E)
(AR-M200/M201)
2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.
Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen
will appear.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6
(2)
Using the machine as a shared printer
(AR-203E/M200/M201)
5) Click the "Add Network Port" button.
In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not
appear.
If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow
these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer.
Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see
the operation manual or help file of your operating system.
1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software".
2) Click the "Custom" button.
6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button.
Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer
name of the machine on the network.
3) Click the "MFP Driver" button.
Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer
that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the
default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution:
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button.
8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the software.
C. Setting up Button Manager
Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner
driver to enable scanning from the machine.
To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the
scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button
Manager to scanner events.
(1)
Windows XP/Vista
1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and
Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel"
and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and
Cameras".
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7
2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from
the "File" menu.
In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize"
menu.
3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
(2)
Windows 98/Me/2000
1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.
Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in
Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options".
3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.
In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu.
4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager T" (AR-203E) or "Sharp Button Manager S" (AR-M200/
M201) from the pull-down menu.
6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application".
6) Click the "Apply" button.
7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T /
S" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for
the other applications and leave only the Button Manager
checkbox selected.
7) Click the "Apply" button.
8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8
11. Interface
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit
A. USB
If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can
alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the
scanner moisture-proof kit described below.
Connector
Type-B connector
A. Components
Cable
Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ)
Shielded twisted pair cable
(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)
1
Pin configuration
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal name
+5V
-DATA
+DATA
GND
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Scanner condensation
prevention mylar
Optical right hole mylar B
Scanner motor metal plate
cushion
Scanner upper surface cushion
Scanner motor lower mylar
Scanner UPG mylar J3
Fan housing cushion
Part code
PSHEZ0493QSZZ
Qty
3
PSHEZ0469QSZZ
PMLT-0106QSZZ
2
2
PMLT-0105QSZZ
PSHEP0600QSZZ
PSHEP0599QSZZ
PMLT-0108QSZ1
1
1
1
1
B. Precautions at installation
Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with
industrial alcohol before the work.
C. Attachment method
Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power
plug from the outlet.
1) Remove the document cover.
Remove the document cover from the copier.
3
4
12. Moving
Moving instructions
When moving the unit, follow the procedure below.
Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge
in advance.
1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the
outlet.
2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the
toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that
order.
To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove
the toner cartridge.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
Remove the four screws and then remove the rear cabinet.
3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.
4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place
and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been
stored in the front of the paper tray.
1
5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.
6) Lock the scan head locking switch.
2
Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must
be locked to prevent shipping damage.
7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,
and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed
during installation of the unit.
8) Pack the unit into the carton.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9
3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass.
<1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass
holder.
Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the
diagram below).
<2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it.
<3> Remove the table glass.
1
2
3
5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown
in the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of
the main unit.
Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar.
4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3
positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below.
Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar.
Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below).
Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the
diagram below).
Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered
as much as possible.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered
as much as possible.
Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram
below).
Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the
center of the raised part.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 10
6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on
the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main
unit.
Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scanner and attach to the surface.
Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered
with the mylar.
Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion
(the yellow line in the diagram below).
Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that
there will be no gap.
Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered.
8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick
together.
20mm - 25mm
Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so
that there will be no gap between them.
Stick together.
Stick together.
9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the
motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit.
7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the
rear side at the rear side of the main unit.
Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow
line in the diagram below).
Do not cover this hole.
Align the edge of the cushion with
the edge of the metal plate.
Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and
along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram).
Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off
the snap band from the hole.
Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so
that it is stuck correctly.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 11
10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the
bottom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar.
Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered.
Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the
metal plate (the yellow mark).
Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too.
13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the position shown in the diagram below.
Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you
see the fan housing from the backside of the machine.
Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed
where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the
fan housing.
Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to
fill the gap between the mylar and the metal plate.
A
View from
the arrow A
Back side
11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original
position.
Reference position
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm
from the edge.
12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the
right side of inside of the scanner.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in
the diagram.
Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the
edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow line in the diagram).
3 - 7mm
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the
gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear
cabinet is filled for sure.
14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3).
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 12
[6] COPY PROCESS
An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.
(Structure of the OPC drum layers)
OPC layer
(20 microns thick)
Pigment layer (0.2
to 0.3 microns thick)
Aluminum drum
1. Functional diagram
Main charger
Laser beam
Cleaning blade
MG roller
Drum
Transfer unit
Resist roller
(Basic operation cycle)
Semiconductor laser
Focus correction lens
Main high voltage unit
Exposure
Charge
Saw tooth
Toner
Developing
Drum
Cleaning
Developer
Cleaning blade
PS roller
Waste toner box
To face
down tray
Paper release
Fusing
Separation
Transfer
Heat roller
Electrode
Transfer charger
Heater lamp
Synchronization
with drum
Manual feed
Cassette
paper feed
Transfer high
voltage unit
Print process
Paper transport route
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 1
2. Outline of print process
Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)
This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor
laser and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC
(Organic Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material.
First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface
and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser
beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface
when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the
print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in
the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure.
A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC
drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser
beam (corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is
formed on the drum surface.
Semiconductor laser
Step-1: Charge
Step-2: Exposure
∗ Latent image is formed on the drum.
Step-3: Developing
Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into
visible image with toner.
Step-4: Transfer
The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred
onto the print paper.
Exposure
(semiconductor laser)
OPC layer
Pigment
layer
Aluminum
drum
Step-5: Cleaning
Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade.
Step-6: Optical discharge
Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by
semiconductor laser beam.
Drum surface charge
after the exposure
3. Actual print process
Step-1: DC charge
A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface
by the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means
of the Scorotron charger.
Non-image area
Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.
About
DC5.5KV
( 580V/ 400V)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 2
Image area
OPC layer
Pigment
layer
Aluminum
layer
Step-3: Developing (DC bias)
Step-4: Transfer
A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component
magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier.
The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print
paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the
backside of the print paper.
Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no
negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible
image appears on the drum surface.
:Carrier (Magnetized particle)
:Toner (Charge negative by friction)
(N) (S) Permanent magnet
(provided in three locations)
N
S
N
About DC 5.2kV
DC
400V 8V
MG roller
Step-5: Separation
Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it
is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is
connected to ground.
Step-6: Cleaning
Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the
cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.
Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 3
Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser)
Start
Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is
radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the
OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state
to the drum surface for the next page to be printed.
1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential
is at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of 400V.
When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the
aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges
on the OPC layer.
2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor
potential is switched from LOW to HIGH.
Semiconductor laser
3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the
drum.
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place.
Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence
Function
The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed
during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly
abates and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of
strong static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a
function to retain the developing bias for a certain period and
decrease the voltage gradually against possible power loss.
Charge by the Scorotron charger
Function
The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface
potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential
regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor.
Basic function
A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the
corona current on the photoconductor.
Basic function
Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time
before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should
stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias
can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal
interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum
surface.
As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main
corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the
current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor
potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the
grid so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a
stable level.
Process controlling
Function
The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the
semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before
the drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is
attracted to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of
the drum.
To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum
potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.
Basic function
Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To
make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at the developer unit.
0
START
STOP
Print potential
Toner attract
potential
Developing bias
2)
3)
1)
Low
4)
Drum potential
High
Time
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 4
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
AR-M200/M201
(Option)
Scanner section
Operation
section
FAX
FAX modem
(Option)
CCD
USB
FAX I/F
Network
Box
Network
USB
Printer/
Scanner I/F
MCU (Main control/image process section)
PC
USB
AR-203E/M200/M201
LSU (Laser unit)
Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens
Laser beam
Paper exit
Fusing section
Process section
Printer section
Paper transport section
Cassette paper
feed section
Manual paper
feed section
(Outline of copy operation)
Printing
Setting conditions
7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum
according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images (toner images).
1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy
density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.
Image scanning
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts
scanning of images.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and
passed through the lens to the CCD.
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion
8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in
synchronization with the image lead edge.
9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner
images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray.
(Outline of printer operation)
3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU.
The print data sent from the PC are passed through the NIC PWB
(in case of network connection) and the MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5) and later.
Image process
(Outline of scanner operation)
4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU
(laser unit) as print data.
The scan data are passed through the MCU to the PC according
to the conditions requested by the operations with the operation
panel.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion
5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and
various lenses to the OPC drum.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1
2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics)
The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images.
Relative sensitivity
It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit
performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the
sub scanning direction by moving the optical unit.
B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source.
Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on
the document table. The reflected light from the document is
reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the
reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3line CCD.
The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line
scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each
color section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When
PC scanning)
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
The resolution is 600dpi.
When copying, only the green component is used to print with the
printer.
1
9
10
8
8
9
The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by
the service simulation.
Sensitivity
100
100.0
75
6
50.2
50
45.4
25
380
480
580
680
7
780
Wavelength [nm]
3
(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)
4
5
2
(Optical unit)
1
4
7
10
Table glass
Mirror 1
CCD PWB
Original
2
5
8
Optical unit
Mirror 2
Lamp
3
6
9
Lens
Mirror 3
Reflector
C. Drive system
The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley
gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the
shaft.
The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the
belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the
idle pulley to drive the optical unit.
9
7
3
1
4
7
Scanner motor
Belt 473
Shaft
4
6
2
5
8
1
2
Pulley gear
Belt 190
Idle gear
8
5
3
6
9
Idle pulley
Optical unit
Table glass
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2
3
3. Laser unit
B. Laser beam path
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent
to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images
are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc.
The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form
images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser
emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in
order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB
works for measurement of the laser writing start point.
4
6
3
2
1
5
C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the
sub scanning direction
6
No
1
2
3
4
5
Component
Semiconductor laser
Collimator lens
Cylinder lens
Polygon mirror,
polygon motor
BD (Lens, PWB)
6
fθ lens
Image surface power: 0.18 ± 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 795nm)
3
Function
Generates laser beams.
Converges laser beams in parallel.
Takes the focus.
Reflects laser beams at a constant
rpm.
Detects start timing of laser
scanning.
Converges laser beams at a spot on
the drum.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at
both ends of the drum same as each
other. (Refer to the figure below.)
Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm
No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces
4. Fuser section
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same
as each other.
a≠b≠c
a
b
d=e=f
c
d
e
f
f θ LENS
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3
A. General description
2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 200°C. The surface temperature during the power save mode
is set to 100°C.
General block diagram (cross section)
Thermal fuse
Separator pawl
PPD2
3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window.
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240°C.
b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100°C
during the copy cycle.
Separator pawl
c. Open thermistor
d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190°C within
27 second after supplying the power.
Thermistor
Pressure roller
This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section
to improve transfer efficiency.
Heat roller
Paper guide
Top view
Heat roller
(4) Fusing resistor
Thermal fuse
Thermistor
Heater lamp
Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper
that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit
and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to
ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.
5. Paper feed section and paper
transport section
A. Paper transport path and general operations
1 2
4
3
16
5
15
Separator pawl
(1)
6
7
Heat roller
8
A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller
is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance
and paper separation.
(2)
9
10
Separator pawl
Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and
prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
(3)
Thermal control
1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply
PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control
the temperature in the fuser unit.
To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser
unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety
purposes.
Heated by the heater
lamp. (950W)
Safety device
(thermal breaker, thermal
fuse)
Triac (in the
power supply unit)
14 13 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Scanner unit
Exposure lamp
LSU (Laser unit)
Paper exit roller
Main charger
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Drum
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
Transfer unit
Pickup roller
Manual paper feed tray
Manual paper feed roller
PS roller unit
Paper feed roller
Paper transport roller
Shifter roller
Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity
of 250 sheets.
The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray
from the front cabinet.
The surface temperature
of the upper heat roller is
sensed by the thermistor.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed operation are given below.
Level of the thermistor is
controlled by the main PWB.
With the signal from the
main PWB, the triac is
controlled on and off.
(power supply PWB)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4
(1)
Cassette paper feed operation
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the
paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial
state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready
lamp.
The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the
clutch sleeve.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts
rotating to drive each drive gear.
The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of
the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to
the pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore.
PFS
OFF
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection
switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from
detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid
(PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into
contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller.
Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the
lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller,
preventing against skew feeding.
PFS
ON
OFF
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and
the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to
disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft.
Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller.
7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed
through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images
are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC
drum by the drum curve and the separation section.
PFS
OFF
OFF
OFF
RRS
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating,
the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment.
This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the
clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to
the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed
the paper.
PFS
RRS
RRS
ON
RRS
OFF
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper
out detector) to the copy tray.
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper
feed latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch
sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5
(2)
Manual multi paper feed operation
1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid
(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
C
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is
engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper
falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating.
A
A
OFF
MPFS
C
ON
MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed
solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed
latch.
A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the
manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the
same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the
manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to
start paper feeding.
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the
resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped
temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the
image on the OPC drum.
From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed
operation from the tray. (Refer to 7-5 - 8.)
5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial
state.
C
A
A
C
ON
MPFS
OFF
MPFS
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6
(3)
Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed
a. When the power is turned on:
PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
b. Copy operation
a
PPD1 jam
b
PPD2 jam
c
POD jam
PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after
turning on the resist roller.
PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the
resist roller.
PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after
turning off the resist roller.
POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after
turning on the resist roller.
POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec
after turning off PPD2.
6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/
document transport (Duplex model)
(AR-M201 only)
C. Back copy
A. Initial state
Set duplex documents on the document tray.
By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper
transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the
back surface of the document is exposed.
Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed
tray cannot be selected.)
• The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower
transport roller and the paper exit roller.
B. Front copy
• The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not
discharged completely.)
Document transport:
The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed
roller to the PS roller.
• The document is exposed in the exposure section, and transported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller
and the paper exit roller.
• The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is
not discharged completely.)
• The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is
performed. (To the back copy)
Document transport:
• The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed.
• The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the
PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the
document exit section.
• The document is discharged to the document exit tray.
Paper transport:
Switchback operation is performed.
Paper transport:
• The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and
the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on
the back surface are transferred.
The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller,
and the images on the front surface are transferred.
• The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to
the paper exit tray.
• The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower
side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is
not discharged completely.)
• The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7
Rotation copy mode:
The front and the back are in upside down each other.
Copy mode without rotation:
The front and the back are not in upside down.
7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201)
Shift width: 2.5cm
The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program.
According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job.
(Default: ON)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.
(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord
for safety.
1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the
harness during the machine is powered. Especially be
careful not to disconnect or connect the harness
between the MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN119)
during the machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or
connected during the machine is powered, the IC inside
the LSU will be destroyed.)
2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be
sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec
before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains
immediately after turning off the power.)
The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the
following sections:
LO C K
(2)
1. High voltage section
2. Operation panel section
3. Optical section
(3)
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
6. Manual paper feed section
3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage.
7. Rear frame section
• If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5)
and later.
8. Power section
9. DV unit section
• If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).
10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only)
11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only)
4) Remove the main charger.
(When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the
sawteeth with an air blower.)
1. High voltage section
A. List
No.
1
2
3
Part name Ref.
Drum
Transfer charger unit
Charger wire
B. Drum replacement
1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)
5) Remove the cleaning blade.
Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed.
If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade.
(Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1
6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove
waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner.
Normal state of the molt
• Machine F side
7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely.
Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade.
8) Attach the cleaning blade.
Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the
unit and fix it with a screw.
Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.
When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade
in the arrow direction and attach.
• Machine R side
Attach the cleaning blade, press the molt on the process frame
with a screwdriver (–), and push it in the clearance between the
process frame and the cleaning blade.
• Machine F side
9) Attach the moquettes.
∗: Check while pressing the blade.
Cleaning blade
Moquette R
0 – 0.3 mm
Moquette F
0.2 – 0.5 mm
• Machine R side
∗
0.2 – 0.5 mm
∗
0 – 0.3 mm
Sub blade
0 – 0.5 mm
0 – 0.5 mm
Cleaning blade
Moquette R
Moquette F
Sub blade
Be careful not to allow the
moquette to cover the sub blade.
Example of NG
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade.
Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket on the sub blade.
Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.
If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it.
(Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2
C. Disassembly procedure
10) Attach the main charger.
Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process
frame.
1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side
cover.
Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the
groove in the process frame.
When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make
contact with the cleaning blade.
1)
2)
11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.
Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia.
2)
2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and
remove the transfer charger.
Lock pawl rear
1)
2)
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade
edge breakage)
Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as
shown.
12) Attach the drum cover.
Transfer
charger
1)
Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.
When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection
gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum
cover to the process frame.
13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged.
Lock pawl front
D. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3
E. Charger wire cleaning
F. Charger wire replacement
1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.
2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and
(2).
At that time, be careful of the following items.
• The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to
Fig.1
• The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be
in the range of the projection section.
• Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
3)
1)
1)
Charger wire
1)
2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol.
2)
1mm
Protrusion
3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure
below.
1.5mm
4)
3)
Fig.1
2. Operation panel section
2)
1)
A. List
No.
1
2
Part name Ref.
Operation panel unit
Operation PWB
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.
1)
2)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4
2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation
panel unit.
(AR-M200/M201)
1)
3)
2)
1)
2)
1)
5)
5)
5)
5)
4)
2)
1)
1)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet.
4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB.
(AR-203E/5420)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
2)
1)
3. Optical section
A. List
1)
NO.
1
2
3
1)
3) 3)
3)
1)
3)
3)
B. Disassembly procedure
3)
4)
3)
Part name Ref.
Copy lamp unit
Copy lamp
Lens unit
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.
1)
3)
2)
2)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5
1)
2) Remove two screws, and remove the earth wire.
10) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure.
3) Disconnect the connector.
11) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.
4) Remove the original cover.
12) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the
tension, and remove the belt.
3)
2)
4)
1)
13) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.
14) Remove the rod.
3)
5) Remove five screws. Remove the operation unit, and disconnect the connector.
6) Remove the right cabinet.
7) Remove the left cabinet.
8) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover.
9) Remove the table glass.
2)
1)
1)
7)
1)
5)
8)
15) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage.
1)
3)
4)
4)
2)
2)
1)
1)
3)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6
1)
C. Assembly procedure
4. Fusing section
CCD core
A. List
1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the carriage unit.
2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back
surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from
the attachment surface.
3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the
base plate.
4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex
tape.
5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to
the base plate.
6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name Ref.
Thermistor
PPD2 sensor
Heater lamp
Pressure roller
Heat roller
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit.
7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB.
Note: Attach the FCC to the base
plate securely with duplex tape to
prevent against coming loose.
1)
3)
Note: Attach the FCC to
fit with the marking line.
2)
Marking line.
2)
3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
1)
2)
Thermistor
3)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7
4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.
7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater
lamp.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Pressure roller section disassembly
5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on
the right side, and open the heat roller section.
Heater lamp
2)
3)
4)
8) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3
pcs.).
6)
3)
5)
1)
5)
2)
6)
6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
1)
1)
2)
PPD2 sensor
9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
3)
1)
2)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8
10) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4
pcs.).
Heat roller disassembly
(Continued from procedure (4).)
5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat
roller section.
2)
3)
2)
2)
2)
2)
1)
1)
3)
2)
11) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left
sides.
6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the
heat roller.
1)
2)
Heat roller
3)
1)
1)
7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.
12) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the
spring.
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (∗).
Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ∗1.
Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ
1
Pressure roller
1
1)
3)
3)
2)
1
2)
1)
1)
2)
3)
8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.
Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the
current model.
Current model
AR-203E/5420
AR-M200/M201
Temperature
210°C
230°C
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9
2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.
3) Disconnect the connector. (2 positions)
4) Remove five screws, and remove the scanner unit.
1)
5) Remove the fan duct.
2)
2)
3)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
3)
1)
2)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
6) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker
unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
A. List
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name Ref.
PPD1 sensor PWB
POD sensor PWB
LSU unit
Intermediate frame unit
Paper feed roller
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the paper holding arm.
Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the
holder from the arm. (AR-M200/M201)
7) Remove the connector.
1)
8) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)
2)
2)
2)
2)
1)
3)
4)
3)
2)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10
2)
9) Remove each connector and four screws, and remove the MCU
PWB. (The shape of the MCU PWB differs depending on the
model.)
11) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit.
(AR-203E/5420)
1)
3)
2)
1)
2)
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
10) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transport detection sensor (POD).
1)
12) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.
(AR-M200/M201)
1)
1)
2)
2)
13) Remove the roller, and remove the belt. (AR-M200/M201)
2)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11
14) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper
exit roller. (AR-203E/5420)
18) Remove the harness guide.
3)
1)
4)
19) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
2)
2)
15) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob.
1)
16) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.
3)
2)
20) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the
belt. (AR-M201)
1)
4)
17) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley,
and the bearing.
1)
2)
1)
2)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12
3)
21) Remove five screws and the grounding wire.
For the AR-203E/5420/M200, remove the main drive plate and
the belt.
For the AR-M201, remove the main drive plate.
23) Remove four screws, and remove the paper guide unit.
(AR-203E/5420)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
1)
1)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200
AL-2030 only
3)
1)
24) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit.
(AR-M200/M201)
[Note for installation]
Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b)
so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.
c b
a
CAUTION:Attach the gears securely
22) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure
release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
1)
1)
1)
1)
3)
2)
4)
2)
1)
1)
4)
2)
3)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13
25) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two
screws, and remove the shifter motor. (AR-M200/M201)
30) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU unit.
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
26) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the
gear. (AR-M200/M201)
[Note for assembling the LSU]
27) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the
shifter roller. (AR-M200/M201)
When installing the LSU, turn the LSU clockwise and fix with
screws in order to provide an attachment backlash in the proper
direction.
Observe the following sequence of fixing screws.
1)
2)
3)
28) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley.
29) Shift and remove the shifter unit. (AR-M200/M201)
3)
2)
4)
3)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14
31) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it.
Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.
3)
34) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit.
35) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS
roller unit.
5)
4)
PS roller unit
Use grease of
Floil FG40H
only to apply to
this section.
4)
PS semi-circular
PS
semi-circuler
earth
plate
earth plate
5)
1)
1)
2)
2)
4)
3)
32) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.
33) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
frame unit to remove.
36) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
3)
1)
4)
2)
2)
2)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15
37) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1
sensor PWB.
6. Manual paper feed section
A. List
No.
1
2
3
4
1)
Part name Ref.
Manual transport roller
Cassette detection switch
PPD1 sensor PWB
Side door detection unit
B. Disassembly procedure
Multi unit
2)
1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
1)
38) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.
39) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
Back
5)
2)
Clutch unit
4)
Paper feed
roller
4)
3)
Front
1)
2)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16
2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit
from the multi paper feed upper frame.
2)
2)
1)
1)
Back
1)
Wire treatment
2)
3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper
frame.
1)
1)
5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed
roller B9.
1)
1)
2)
1)
3)
L O CK
T O
K
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17
2)
D. Pressure plate holder attachment
6) Remove the pick-up roller.
1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.
Seal M1-N
1)
Pressure plate
holder
Attachment
reference
2)
7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
1)
Attachment
reference
7. Rear frame section
A. List
Multi paper feed
solenoid
3)
2)
No.
1
2
3
4
Part name Ref.
Scanner motor
Main motor
Exhaust fan motor
Main PWB
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.
1)
2)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
2)
1)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18
1)
2) Remove the connector.
3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)
7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the
exhaust fan motor.
Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan.
Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.
1)
2)
2)
3)
1)
3)
2)
2)
2)
4) Disconnect the connector.
Blowing direction
5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.
8) Disconnect the connectors.
9) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
1)
1)
1)
3)
2)
3)
2)
2)
1)
1)
1) 2)
1)
6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main
motor.
2)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
3)
1)
2)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 19
8
Power section
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
1)
A. List
No.
1
Part name Ref.
Power PWB
2)
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Disconnect each connector.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.
4)
1)
1)
1)
1)
3) Remove the used developer.
2)
1)
3)
5)
4)
4) Supply new developer.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
9. DV unit section
A. Developer
1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove
the TN guide.
B. DV seal
1) Peel off the old DV seal.
2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
1)
3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position.
DV side seal F
C
A
DV side seal R
D
B
0.5
A
0
0
C 0.5
0.5
2)
X
D
0.5
0
B
0
X
Bump
B
X-X
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 20
Magnification ratio:
200%
C. DV blade
E. DV sensor
1) Peel off the old DV blade.
1) Remove the Mylar.
2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor.
3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position.
* Clean the sensor (A) section.
A
1)
B
0.5
DV blade IC
A
2)
0
3)
2)
DV-BOX AS
B
D. DV doctor
A
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor.
* Clean the edge (A) section.
10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only)
A. List
No.
1
1)
A
Part name Ref.
Duplex motor
B. Disassembly procedure
2)
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1)
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the Duplex motor cover.
■ Note for installation
4) Remove the Duplex motor.
1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure.
2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw.
* Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the
figure below.
MG-ROL
DG check
gauge
C
DG sect
F/R :1.5 ion
DG se 5
:1. ctio 0.15
5
n
0.1
0
* After checking the DG,
apply screw lock.
FRONT
1
20
F
10
10
C
3
REAR
R
110
20
2
DG check
position
1
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor
gear with the belt on the main body side.
C. Assembly procedure
DG check
gauge
DG check
gauge
DG check
gauge
1
2
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 21
11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only)
A. List
No.
1
Part name Ref.
Reverse roller
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove four screws.
2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire.
3) Remove the reverse unit.
2
3
1
4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
1
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.
Main scanning direction magnification ratio
1. Optical section
=
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment
X 100 (%)
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)
Original (Scale)
The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use
SIM 48-1.
(1)
Copy image dimensions
Original dimension
mm
1/2mm
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
HARDENED
STAINLESS
130
140
150
Shizuoka
Outline
The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made automatically or manually.
Paper feed
direction
mm
1/2mm
HARDENED
STAINLESS
JAPAN
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
150
Shizuoka
Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on
the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically.
Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by [Copy quantity]
keys (or [Numeric] keys for the AR-M200/M201) operations. (In
either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.)
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by
changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.
(2)
Main scanning direction magnification ratio
adjustment
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Necessary tools
Reference
Comparison point
Copy
110
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copy
magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201).
In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the START switch is
pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading
to scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction
value and displaying and storing this value.
After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simulation mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio.
• Screwdriver (+)
If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 ± 1.0%),
manually adjust as follows.
• Scale
(AR-203E/5420)
c. Adjustment procedure
Adjustment mode
Display lamp
Main scanning direction
TEXT mode lamp
magnification ratio
OC mode sub scan
PHOTO mode lamp
direction magnification ratio
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long
scale for precise adjustment.)
Default
50
50
(AR-M200/M201)
Adjustment mode
Main scan direction
magnification ratio
OC mode sub scan
direction magnification ratio
Display
LED
Default
item
F-R
PRINT mode lamp
50
SCAN SCAN mode lamp
50
8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity key (or [Numeric] key for the
AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key.
9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is
within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is
changed by 0.1%.
(3)
Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
1) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part
is replaced.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
2) When the main PWB is replaced.
3) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
4) When "U2" trouble occurs.
b. Necessary tools
• Scale
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
c. Adjustment procedure
B. Image position adjustment
1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a
long scale for precise adjustment.)
There are following eleven kinds of image position adjustments,
which are made by laser control except for the image scan start
position adjustment. For the adjustments, SIM 50-01 and 50-10 are
used.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Mode
Print start position (Main cassette paper feed)
Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position (Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void amount
Image scan start position
Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed)
Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed)
Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (Manual paper feed)
2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)
SIM
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10
(AR-203E/5420)
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [Exposure
mode selector] key.
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting
lamps are as shown in the table below.
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
using the formula below.
=
Copy image dimensions
Original dimension
X 100 (%)
110
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
JAPAN
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
Shizuoka
mm
1/2mm
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
130
140
Paper feed
direction
Comparison point
AE, manual feed lamp
TEXT lamp
PHOTO lamp
AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting
lamps are as shown in the table below.
150
Shizuoka
Reference
AE, 2nd cassette lamp
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [Exposure
mode selector] key.
150
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
Lamp ON
AE, main cassette lamp
: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode.
Original (Scale)
mm
1/2mm
Adjustment mode
Print start position
(Main cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void quantity
Image scan start position
Image rear edge void quantity
Copy
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the
specified range. (100 ± 1.0%).
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copy
magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
] [
] key for the AR-M200/M201). (PHOTO
lamp ON (or SCAN mode lamp ON for the AR-M200/M201))
Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit
Adjustment mode
Print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (2nd cassette)
Print center offset
(Manual paper feed)
Second side center offset
Lamp ON
AE, main cassette lamp
AE, 2nd cassette lamp
AE, manual paper feed
lamp
TEXT lamp
: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode.
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the [Copy quantity] keys (or [Numeric] keys for
the AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key.
Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual
copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified
range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is
changed by 0.1%.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2
(AR-M200/M201)
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [
key.
][
]
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting
lamps are as shown in the table below.
Adjustment mode
Print start position
(Main cassette paper feed)
(*) Print start position
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void
amount
Image scan start position
Image rear edge void
amount (Cassette paper
feed)
Image rear edge void
amount (Manual paper
feed)
Display item
Lamp ON
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
DEN-A
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
RRC-A
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
DEN-B
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
RRC-B
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [
key.
][
4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image.
Set C = 10 X R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is
decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge
and the image print start position.
Set A = 10 X H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is
shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50)
6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm).
When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is
increased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void
amount becomes zero. (Default: 50)
(Example)
Distance between paper lead
edge and image: H = 5mm
Image loss:
R = 3mm
5mm
]
10mm
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting
lamps are as shown in the table below.
Adjustment mode
Print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
Print center offset
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print center offset
(Manual paper feed)
2nd print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
(1)
Display item
Lamp ON
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
SIDE2
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(2)
Image rear edge void amount adjustment
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper
size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2"
x 14" paper.
B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper
A4 size rear edge
Lead edge adjustment
1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.
2) Execute SIM 50-01 to select the image rear edge void amount
adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm)
Scale image
2) Execute SIM 50-01
3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void
amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position
(PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at
100%. (AR-203E/5420)
For the AR-M200/M201, the following LED’s are lighted:
• AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A)
• TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B)
• PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3
Paper rear edge
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change
the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
The default value is 50.
2. Copy density adjustment
Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet
after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after
turning off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the
cassette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear
edge void.
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following
cases:
(3)
Center offset adjustment
A. Copy density adjustment timing
• When maintenance is performed.
• When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
• When the optical section is cleaned.
• When a part in the optical section is replaced.
1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment
so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide.
• Test chart for the center position adjustment.
Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper
transport direction.
Document guide
• When the optical section is disassembled.
• When the OPC drum is replaced.
• When the main control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
• When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
B. Note for copy density adjustment
1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment
• Clean the optical section.
• Clean or replace the charger wire.
Center
• Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range.
Copy paper
(A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″)
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment
2) Execute SIM 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette
paper feed) adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
• One of the following test charts:
UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE
• B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper
• The user program AE setting should be "3."
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly
positioned.
The standard value is 0 ± 2mm from the paper center.
Test chart comparison table
(Copy A)
2.0mm or less
Copy image
Shift
(Copy B)
Copy paper
folding line
2.0mm or less
Copy image
Shift
Copy paper
folding line
(Paper feed direction)
UKOG0162FCZZ
DENSITY
No.
UKOG0089CSZZ
DENSITY
No.
KODAK
GRAY
SCALE
1
2
0.1
3
4
0.2
1
5
6
7
8
0.3
2
3
4
9
10
W
0.5 1.9
0
19
A
D. Features of copy density adjustment
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the
set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is
shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame.
For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used.
List of the adjustment modes
• For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed
adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.
Auto mode
Manual mode
• Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by
the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of
document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
Photo mode
Manual T/S mode
T/S Auto mode
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4
Brightness 1 step only
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 1 step only
E. Copy density adjustment procedure
Use SIM 46-1 to set the copy density for each copy mode.
For selection of modes, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or
[
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201).
(1)
Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting
1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4
(14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.
Adjustment
mode
Auto mode
Text mode
Photo mode
Text T/S mode
Display
item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
Auto T/S mode TSAE
Sharp gray chart
adjustment level
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly copied.
SCAN mode lamp
3) Make a copy.
Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the
exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
Non toner
save
mode
White paper
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
6
7
8
9
10
W
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
Toner
save
mode
1
2
Test chart
3
4
5
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy
quantity display.
(When too dark):
(2)
Perform the adjustment in each mode.
1) Execute SIM 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute SIM
46-02.
Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display.
∗ The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.
3. High voltage adjustment
2) AR-203E/5420
Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select
key. Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for
the auto mode.)
A. Main charger (Grid bias)
(1)
• Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or
more measurement.
(2)
(1) Exposure mode select key/display lamp
(2) [Exposure mode selector] key/
display lamp
Adjustment
mode
Auto mode
Manual mode
Photo mode
Manual T/S
mode
Auto T/S
mode
Exposure mode
display lamp
Auto lamp ON
Manual lamp ON
Photo lamp ON
Manual lamp/Photo lamp ON
Sharp gray chart
adjustment level
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
Auto lamp/Photo lamp ON
"3" is slightly copied.
Note:
• After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do
not reverse the sequence.
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3
(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the
negative side to the frame ground (power frame).
3) Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30
sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is
580 ± 12V.
2) AR-M200/M201
Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure key. Set the
exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for the
auto mode.)
VRG1
TEXT
| | | | |
1
2
2
1
2
1
(1) Exposure mode, level display
2
1
(2) Exposure key
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5
B. DV bias check
Note: • A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must
be use for correct check.
• The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can
be made.
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown
below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.
Scale (S-D mode)
Scale (D-S mode)
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1
(DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground
(power frame).
3) Execute SIM 8-1 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and
check that the output is –400 ± 8V.
VRDV
3) Execute simulation 50-18.
Mode
Display item Default
LED
OC memory reverse
OC
50
COPY mode lamp
output position
SPF/RSPF memory
SPF
50
PRINT mode lamp
reverse output position
Select the SPF/RSPF memory reverse output position, and
press [START] key to make a copy.
Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than
4.0 mm in the SPF/RSPF mode.
An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
image loss.
Front edge of paper
The front edge of the
scale on test chart
less than 4 mm
Void area
5 10
4. Duplex adjustment
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in
memory for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201)
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a
document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.
That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing
mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image
data is once stored in memory.
The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document
delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the
OC mode)and stored in memory.
This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.
In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be
adjusted by changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy
mode (AR-M201)
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end
void) in duplex copying.
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from
the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to
make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part.
There are two adjustment modes:
1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT)
5 10
This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by
changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6
2) Print start position (Duplex back surface) (SPF/RSPF) 50-19
(PHOTO)
The size (length) of a document read from the SPF/RSPF is
detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity
at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image
cut trailing edge void quantity (SPF/RSPF) is adjusted.
(Adjustment procedure)
(1)
Paper trailing edge void quantity
2) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp and make
the printing mode in the S-D mode.
3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during
this adjustment.
4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the
image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An
increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
void area.
Void position to be checked
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side
of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)
5. Automatic black level correction
2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
Document guide
The trailing edge has a scale
1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Adjustment procedure
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level
adjustment of white balance.
When SIM 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number.
Table glass
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the
correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on
the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the
plate left center.
3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first
cassette.
10
• Letter paper: 4
• A4 paper: 3
Chart back surface
4) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and make
the printing mode in OC-D mode.
Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale
on the image.
Void position to be check
When [START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart
and calculates the correction value.
Paper
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on
the display section.
∗ Default: 0
∗ If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
AR-M200/M201
c. Operation
1) Initial display
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface
is shown above.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in
1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2)
Print start position (Duplex back surface)
1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown
below.
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
0
2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed->
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby
mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
Scale (S-D mode)
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the simulation mode
Sim
No.
02
Sub
code
03
06
08
To enter the serviceman simulation mode, press the keys as follows:
AR-203E/AR-5420
[Clear] key → Exposure mode selector key → [Clear] key →
Exposure mode selector key
AR-M200/AR-M201
[#] key → [∗] key → [Clear] key → [∗] key
09
03
05
To cancel the simulation mode, press the [Clear All] key.
06
2. Key rule
07
AR-203E/AR-5420
[ ] [ ] key:
Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Setting of the adjustment values for the
adjustment-related simulations
When [%] key is pressed simultaneously, the
value is displayed in the descending
sequence such as [0] → [9], not as [0] → [1].
Settlement
<In case of simulations for print>
[START] key: Settlement / Print
[START] key:
[Exposure mode
selector] key:
[Clear] key:
Selection of an item
(Interrupting operation check) Returns to the
upper hierarchy.
On the initial display (00-00), it terminates the
simulation.
Exits from the simulation mode.
For a simulation of adjustment, the display
returns to the initial display (00-00).
08
09
02
04
10
14
16
20
21
22
AR-M200/AR-M201
[Numeric] key:
[
][
] key:
[OK]/[ENTER]/
[START] key:
[Clear] key:
[Clear All] key:
Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
Setup of an adjustment value in case of
simulations for adjustment
Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
Settlement
<In case of simulations for print>
[OK]/[ENTER] key: Settlement (Without print)
[START] key: Settlement / Print
(Interrupting operation check) Returns to the
upper hierarchy.
In case of simulation of operation check,
terminates the operations.
Exits from the simulation mode.
For a simulation of adjustment, the display
returns to the initial display (00-00).
3. List of simulations
Sim
No.
01
02
Sub
code
01
02
06
01
02
Operation
Mirror scan operation
Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display
Aging of mirror scanning
SPF/RSPF aging operation (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
SPF/RSPF sensor status display (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
03
01
02
03
01
02
01
06
08
01
02
03
06
01
01
01
01
02
04
05
06
08
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
21
22
24
01
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
13
14
Operation
SPF/RSPF Motor ON (Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Resist clutch ON (SPF) (AR-203E only)
RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed)
RSPF reverse solenoid operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed)
Shifter operation check (AR-M200/M201)
Operation panel display check
Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check
Copy lamp ON
Paper feed solenoid ON
Resist solenoid ON
Warm-up display and aging with jam
Intermittent aging
Shift to copy with the warm-up display
Developing bias
Main charger (Grid high)
Grid voltage (Low)
Transfer charger
Duplex motor normal rotation operation check
(AR-M201 only)
Duplex motor reverse operation check
(AR-M201 only)
Duplex motor rotation speed adjustment
(AR-M201 only)
Toner motor aging
Cancel of troubles other than U2
Cancel of U2 trouble
Maintenance counter clear
Maintenance cycle setting
Maintenance counter display
Maintenance preset display
JAM total counter display
Total counter display
Developer counter display
SPF/RSPF counter display (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
FAX-related counter display
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Drum counter display
CRUM type display
ROM version display
Duplex counter display (AR-M201 only)
Copy counter display
Printer counter display
Scanner mode counter display
(AR-203E/M200/M201)
Scanner counter display
SPF/RSPF JAM counter display (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
JAM total counter clear
SPF/RSPF counter clear (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Duplex counter clear (AR-M201 only)
Developer counter clear
Drum counter clear
Copy counter clear
Printer counter clear
FAX counter clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Scanner counter clear
SPF/RSPF JAM total counter clear (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1
Sim
No.
24
Sub
code
15
25
01
26
30
41
10
02
03
04
06
07
20
30
37
39
40
42
43
54
62
01
06
07
43
46
01
04
05
14
01
02
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
29
30
31
32
39
48
01
05
49
50
01
01
06
10
Operation
Scanner mode counter clear
(AR-203E/M200/M201)
Main motor operation check
(Cooling fan motor rotation check)
Polygon motor ON
SPF/RSPF setup
Second cassette setup
Machine duplex setup
Destination setup
Machine conditions check
Rear edge void setup
CE mark support control ON/OFF
Cancel of stop at developer life over
Memory capacity check
Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for
turning OFF after completion of printing)
Transfer ON timing control setup
Side void setup
γ life correction setting
Energy-save mode copy lamp setup
Paper sensor status display
OC cover float detection level adjustment (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
OC cover float detection margin setting (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy)
Fusing temperature setting in multi copy
Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy
(AR-M201 only)
Fusing start temperature setting
Copy density adjustment (300dpi)
Copy density adjustment (600dpi)
Density adjustment in the FAX mode
(Collective adjustment)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Image contrast adjustment (300dpi)
Exposure mode setup
SPF/RSPF exposure correction (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Image contrast adjustment (600dpi)
AE limit adjustment
Image sharpness adjustment
Copier color reproduction setup
FAX mode sharpness adjustment
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub
scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment
SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification
ratio in copying (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201
with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Flash ROM program writing mode
Lead edge image position
Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF)
(Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)
Center offset adjustment
Sim
No.
50
Sub
code
12
18
19
51
53
02
08
61
63
03
01
02
12
13
01
01
64
66
02
03
04
05
07
10
11
12
13
17
18
21
24
30
33
34
37
38
67
50
Operation
Document off-center adjustment
Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex
copy (Only the AR-M201, or the AR-M200 with the
RSPF installed)
Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment
(AR-M201 only)
Resist quantity adjustment
SPF/RSPF scan position automatic adjustment
(Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)
Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check)
Shading check
Black level automatic correction
Light quantity stabilization wait time setting
Light quantity stabilization band setting
Self print (1by2 mode)
FAX soft SW setting
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX soft SW initializing
(excluding the adjustment values)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX PWB memory check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Signal send mode (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Signal send mode (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Image memory content print
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Image memory content clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
300bps signal send (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
300bps signal send (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Dial test
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
DTMF signal send (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX information print
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAST SRAM clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
TEL/LIU status change check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Signal detection check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Communication time measurement
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Speaker sound volume setting
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Time setting/check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
USB receive speed adjustment (USB1.1)
(AR-203E only)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2
4. Descriptions of various simulations
Main
code
01
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Mirror scan operation
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base
performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the "Drum replacement required lamp
(or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)". (When the mirror is in the home position,
the lamp lights up.)
During operation, the copy lamp lights up.
When [Clear] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine
goes to the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 100% +
2) [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO]
key
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 78% +
2) [
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
01-01 SCAN CHK
EXECUTING... -
78% +
] key
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 99% +
2) [
] key
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 101% +
02
Mirror home position sensor
(MHPS) status display
[Function]
Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "Drum replacement required lamp (or
the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)" turn on during the sensor ON status.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
01-02 MHP-SENSOR
EXECUTING...
06
Aging of mirror scanning
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of
the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.
∗ When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "Drum replacement required lamp
(or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)." (The lamp is ON when the mirror is in the
home position.)
During aging, the copy lamp is ON.
02
01
SPF/RSPF aging operation
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is obtained. For the
SPF, the single-face document transport is performed. For the RSPF, the duplex document
transport is performed.
However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of
a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3
Main
code
02
Sub
code
02
Contents
Details of function/operation
SPF/RSPF sensor status
display (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function]
The ON/OFF status of the SPF/RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD/LED.
When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD/LED.
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
SPID
Sensor
Document set sensor
RSPF document transport sensor
RSPF paper feed cover open/close
sensor
RSPF paper exit sensor
SPPD
SDSW
Display item
(AR-203E)
TD cartridge replacement required
lamp
Misfeed lamp
—
SPOD
—
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
02-02 SPF SENSOR
03
06
08
SPF/RSPF Motor ON
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
Resist clutch ON (SPF)
(AR-203E only)
RSPF paper feed solenoid
operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201
with the RSPF installed)
2) When the sensor is ON:
02-02 SPF SENSOR
SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set magnification ratio.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.
When the [START] key is pressed, the SPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF
(500 ms) 20 times.
[Function]
The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by
the use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-08 SPF SPUS CHK
EXECUTING...
09
RSPF reverse solenoid
operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201
with the RSPF installed)
[Function]
The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the
use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK
EXECUTING...
03
03
Shifter operation check
(AR-M200/M201)
[Function]
The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
03-03 SHIFTER CHK
EXECUTING...
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4
Main
code
05
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Operation panel display
check
[Function]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned
ON (all pixels ON).
After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
When [Mode Select] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual
ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower
side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted
simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub
code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms)
When [Clear] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode.
<Key input check mode>
When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the value display section indicates "– –
–" (For the AR-M200/M201, 0 of the LCD is indicated).
When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the
value.
Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted.
When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check
mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec.
When [Clear] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second
time, the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed.
(Note in the key input check mode)
• Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into
the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status)
• Multi key input is ignored.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
1) Initial display
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
2) When [Mode Select] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode.
<Key input check mode>
1) Initial display
2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
05-01 LCD/LED CHK.
0
05-01 LCD/LED CHK.
**
02
Fusing lamp, cooling fan
operation check
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF
for 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates.
Note:
When the CE mark setting is ON, the slow start function may operate depending on the
employed frequency. If the state of the heater lamp cannot be checked, temporarily set SIM 2630 to "0" and check the lamp state. After confirming that the heater lamp is ON, set SIM 26-30
to "1" again.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
05-02 HT LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...
03
Copy lamp ON
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
05-03 C-LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5
Main
code
06
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Paper feed solenoid ON
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for
500ms and OF for 500ms 20 times.
When tray select key (or [Numeric] key or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed,
the paper feed solenoid setting is switched.
Code number
0
1
2
Setting
CPFS1
CPFS2
MPFS
Remark
Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
2) [Numeric] key or [
06-01 PSOL CHK
0:CPFS1
] key
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
06-01 PSOL CHK
1:CPFS2
2) [Numeric] key or [
06-01 PSOL CHK
EXECUTING...
] key
4) Returns to the initial
display.
06-01 PSOL CHK
2:MPFS
02
Resist solenoid ON
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and
OFF for 500ms 20 times.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
06-02 RES.R SOL CHK
EXECUTING...
07
01
Warm-up display and aging
with jam
[Function]
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the simulation is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second from 0 and displayed.
When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [Clear All] key is pressed, the ready
lamp lights up.
After that, enter the copy quantity with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201)
and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec).
To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which causes hardware
reset.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
2) After 10sec
07-01 W-UP/AGING
07-01 W-UP/AGING
0
06
Intermittent aging
10
[Function]
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
Enter the copy quantity with the [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies,
and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to make the set quantity of
copies. These operations are repeated.
To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which executes hardware reset.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display (Basic display of copy)
READY TO COPY
100%
A4
08
Shift to copy with the
warm-up display
0
[Function]
Enter the simulation code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second from 0 and displayed.
When [Clear All] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting
is stopped. However, warm-up is continued.
After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from simulation 07-01.)
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
2) After 10sec
07-08 W-UP C-MODE
07-08 W-UP C-MODE
0
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6
10
Main
code
08
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Developing bias
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec.
When, however, an actual output value is measured, use simulation 25-01.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
08-01 DVLP BIAS SET.
EXECUTING...
02
Main charger (Grid high)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid
voltage HIGH move.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
08-02 MHV(H) SET.
EXECUTING...
03
Grid voltage (Low)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid
voltage LOW move.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
08-03 MHV(L) SET.
EXECUTING...
06
Transfer charger
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
08-06 THV SET.
EXECUTING...
09
01
Duplex motor normal
rotation operation check
(AR-M201 only)
[Function]
Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-01 DPLX ROT.
EXECUTING...
02
Duplex motor reverse
operation check
(AR-M201 only)
[Function]
Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-02 DPLX ROT.REV.
EXECUTING...
04
Duplex motor rotation speed
adjustment (AR-M201 only)
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [Numeric] key and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key. The
entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The
greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the
speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
8( 1-13)
2) [Numeric] key
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
7( 1-13)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
7( 1-13)
Main
code
10
Sub
code
Contents
Details of function/operation
Toner motor aging
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
10-00 TONER MOTOR
EXECUTING...
14
Cancel of troubles other than
U2
[Function]
Used to cancel troubles other than U2.
∗ Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware
reset.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
14-00 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED
16
Cancel of U2 trouble
[Function]
Used to cancel U2 trouble.
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is
rewritten and hardware reset is made.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
16-00 U2 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED
20
01
Maintenance counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and
"000,000" is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display
AR-203E/5420
The count value is displayed in 3 digits X 2
times repeatedly.
20-01 M-CNT CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
<Display example: 012,345>
012 → Blank → 345 → Blank → 012
0.7s
0.3s
0.7s
1.0s
0.7s
21
01
Maintenance cycle setting
[Function]
The currently set code of the maintenance cycle is displayed, and the newly set data are saved.
Enter the code number with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/
M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is saved and the display returns to the sub
code input standby state.
Code number
0
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
3,000 sheets
6,000 sheets
9,000 sheets
13,000 sheets
25,000 sheets
Free (999,999 sheets)
Remark
Default
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) The current set value is
displayed.
21-01 M-CYCLE
4:25,000
( 0-5 )
2) [
] key or [Numeric] key
21-01 M-CYCLE
5:FREE
( 0-5 )
2) [
] key or [Numeric] key
21-01 M-CYCLE
3:13,000
( 0-5 )
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
21-01 M-CYCLE
5:FREE
( 0-5 )
Main
code
22
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Maintenance counter display
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-01 M-CNT
***,***
02
Maintenance preset display
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the preset value (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with simulation 21-01 is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-02 M-CNT PRESET
***,***
04
JAM total counter display
[Function]
The JAM total counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-04 JAM TTL CNT
***,***
05
Total counter display
[Function]
The total counter value is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-05 TTL CNT
***,***
06
Developer counter display
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is obtained and displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-06 DVLP CNT
***,***
08
SPF/RSPF counter display
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
[Function]
The SPF/RSPF counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-08 SPF CNT
***,***
11
FAX-related counter display
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
The FAX-related counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT COUNTER
1:PAGE
2:TIME
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 1
SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx
RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx
2) Select 2
TX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx
RX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx
("xxx,xxx" is the current value.)
("xxxxx: xx. xx" is the current value.)
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9
Main
code
22
Sub
code
12
Contents
Details of function/operation
Drum counter display
[Function]
The drum counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-12 DRUM CNT
***,***
13
CRUM type display
[Function]
The CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is displayed.
Code number
00
01
02
03
99
CRUM type
Not set
BTA-A
BTA-B
BTA-C
Conversion
Display item
0
BTA-A
BTA-B
BTA-C
CONVERSION
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) The CRUM type is displayed.
22-13 CRUM TYPE
01:BTA-A
14
ROM version display
[Function]
The P-ROM version is displayed.
Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [
play version.
Code number
0
1
2
Version
Main unit Program
F-IMC Program
LCD DATA
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the dis-
Display item
MAIN PROG.
F-IMC PROG.
LCD DATA
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display
22-14 ROM VER.
MAIN PROG.
00.00
2) [Numeric] key or [
] key
22-14 ROM VER.
F-IMC PROG.
00.00
2) [Numeric] key or [
] key
22-14 ROM VER.
LCD DATA
00.00
AR-203E/5420
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
16
Duplex counter display
(AR-M201 only)
[Function]
The duplex counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-16 DPLX CNT
***,***
17
Copy counter display
[Function]
The copy counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-17 COPIES CNT
***,***
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10
Main
code
22
Sub
code
18
Contents
Details of function/operation
Printer counter display
[Function]
The printer counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-18 PRT.CNT
***,***
19
Scanner mode counter
display
(AR-203E/M200/M201)
[Function]
The scanner mode counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-19 S-MODE CNT
***,***
21
Scanner counter display
[Function]
The scanner counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-21 SCAN CNT
***,***
22
SPF/RSPF JAM counter
display (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function]
The SPF/RSPF JAM counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22-22 S JAM CNT
***,***
24
01
JAM total counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-01 JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
04
SPF/RSPF counter clear
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-04 SPF CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
05
Duplex counter clear
(AR-M201 only)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-05 DPLX CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11
Main
code
24
Sub
code
06
Contents
Details of function/operation
Developer counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-06 DVLP CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
07
Drum counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-07 DRUM CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
08
Copy counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-08 COPIES CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
09
Printer counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-09 PRT.CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
10
FAX counter clear
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-10 FAX CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
13
Scanner counter clear
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-13 SCAN CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
14
SPF/RSPF JAM total
counter clear (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared
to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-14 S JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12
Main
code
24
Sub
code
15
Contents
Details of function/operation
Scanner mode counter clear
(AR-203E/M200/M201)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0,
and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E
1) Initial display
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24-15 S-MODE CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
25
01
Main motor operation check
(Cooling fan motor rotation
check)
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case
of a duplex model) is operated for 30sec.
To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main
charger, and the grid are also outputted.
In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also
operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the
high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.
To check the developing bias, install the developing unit.
After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK
EXECUTING...
10
Polygon motor ON
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for
30sec.
After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine
goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
25-10 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...
26
02
SPF/RSPF setup
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set SPF/RSPF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired SPF/RSPF and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the
setting.
Code number
0
1
2
SPF/RSPF
SPF NO
SPF YES
RSPF YES
Display item
SPF OFF
SPF ON
RSPF ON
For the AR-203E/5420, the code number cannot be set to 2.
For the AR-M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) The current set value is
displayed.
26-02 SPF/RSPF
1:SPF ON
(0- 2)
2) [Numeric] key or [
26-02 SPF/RSPF
0:SPF OFF (0- 2)
03
Second cassette setup
] key
2) [Numeric] key or [
] key
26-02 SPF/RSPF
2:RSPF ON (0- 2)
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
1) Press [ ] [ ] key to
change the code number.
2) Press [START] key to fix
the code number.
26-02 SPF/RSPF
2:RSPF ON (0- 2)
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to
save the setting.
Code number
0
1
Second cassette
Second cassette NO
Second cassette YES
Display item
OFF
ON
For the AR-203E/5420/M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13
Main
code
26
Sub
code
04
Contents
Details of function/operation
Machine duplex setup
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number
corresponding to the desired duplex and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
Duplex
Duplex NO
Duplex YES*
Display item
OFF
ON
* AR-203E/5420/M200: cannot be executed.
06
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the
setting.
Destination setup
Code number
0
1
2
Destination
Display item
INCH
AB
–
Inch series
EX Japan AB series
Japan AB series
* Code number 2 cannot be selected.
07
Machine conditions check
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
CPM
20 CPM
Copy quantity
20
Remark
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) The machine setting is displayed.
26-07 CPM
20 CPM
20
Rear edge void setup
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to
save the setting.
Code number
0
1
30
CE mark support control
ON/OFF
39
Cancel of stop at developer
life over
Memory capacity check
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter
the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK]/
[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
37
Setting
Rear edge void NO
Rear edge void YES
Setting
CE mark support control OFF
CE mark support control ON
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default (100V series)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number and
press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 21-01.
[Function]
When the simulation is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed.
Code number
8
16
Setting
8 MBYTE
16 MBYTE
Remark
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Memory capacity display
26-39 MEM.CHK
8 MBYTE
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14
Main
code
26
Sub
code
40
42
Contents
Details of function/operation
Polygon motor OFF time
setup (Time required for
turning OFF after completion
of printing)
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
Transfer ON timing control
setup
Code number
Setting
0
1
2
3
0sec
30sec
60sec
90sec
Display item
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
0 SEC.
0
30 SEC.
30
60 SEC.
60
90 SEC.
90
Remark
Default
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
AR-203E/5420
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.
Enter the code number and press the [START] key, and the setting will be changed. (For any
number different from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.)
<Paper lead edge adjustment table>
Code number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting
Default (236 msec)
–20 msec
–18 msec
–16 msec
–14 msec
–12 msec
–10 msec
–8 msec
–6 msec
–4 msec
–2 msec
Code number
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Setting
Default (236 msec)
+2 msec
+4 msec
+6 msec
+8 msec
+10 msec
+12 msec
+14 msec
+16 msec
+18 msec
+20 msec
* The default value, "11," of the transfer ON timing indicates "236msec passed from PS
release."
* When set to "0," it is same as setting to the default, "11."
* The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to 236msec ± 2ms.
AR-M200/M201
For the AR-M200/M201, the adjustment can be made individually for each of the following
modes.
Mode
Front surface paper lead edge
Front surface paper rear edge
Back surface paper lead edge
Back surface paper rear edge
Display item
F-REAR
F-END
B-REAR
B-END
Default
11
50
11
50
Setting range
0 - 21
1 - 99
0 - 21
1 - 99
<Paper lead edge adjustment table> is the same as that of the AR-203E/5420 above.
<Front/back surface of paper rear edge adjustment table>
Code
1
...
49
50
51
...
99
Setting
–98 msec
...
–2 msec
0 msec
+2 msec
...
+98 msec
Remark
Default
* The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing indicates "210msec passed from PPD1OFF."
* The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to 210msec ± 2ms.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
<Front surface lead edge setting>
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-REAR
11( 0-21 )
2) [
][
] key: Mode selection
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END
50( 1-99 )
3) [Numeric] key: Value entry
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END
51( 1-99 )
4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key:
Settles the entered value. The display is
shifted to the sub code input standby
menu.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15
Main
code
26
Sub
code
43
Contents
Details of function/operation
Side void setup
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 – 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm))
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
Remark
Default
Code
6
7
8
9
10
Setting
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
4.5 mm
5.5 mm
Remark
* When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:
Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of "Set value x
0.5mm" is made.)
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
1) Initial display
1) Press [ ] [ ] key to change the code
number.
26-43 SIDE VOID
4( 0-10)
2) Press [START] key to fix the code number.
2) [Numeric] key
26-43 SIDE VOID
5( 0-10)
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key
26-43 SIDE VOID
5( 0-10)
54
γ life correction setting
[Function]
Used to set the γ life correction.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
(Setting range: 0 – 1, default: 1)
Code number
0
1
62
Energy-save mode copy
lamp setup
01
Paper sensor status display
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired
code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
30
Setting
OFF
ON
Setting
Copy lamp OFF
Copy lamp half-ON
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD/LED.
Sensor
Paper exit sensor
No. 1 tray paper width sensor
(AR-M200/M201 only)
No. 2 tray paper width sensor
(AR-M200/ M201 only)
Paper entry sensor
Duplex sensor (AR-M201 only)
No. 2 tray paper feed sensor
New drum cartridge sensor
Display item
Display lamp (AR-203E/5420)
(AR-M200/M201)
POD
Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp
PD1
—
PD2
PPD1
PPD2
PPD3
DRST
—
Developer cartridge replacement lamp
JAM lamp
2nd cassette lamp
Zoom lamp
∗ Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed.
∗ The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
30-01 P-SENSOR
2) When sensor ON
30-01 POD PD1 PD2
PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 16
Main
code
41
Sub
code
06
Contents
Details of function/operation
OC cover float detection
level adjustment (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK]/[ENTER]/
[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF/RSPF scan position to acquire
the OC cover float detection level.
When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed.
If the adjustment is NG, the following message is displayed.
AR-203E/5420: Misfeed lamp lights up, and the 7seg display remains unchanged.
AR-M200/M201: The LCD indicates "ERR."
Note that, this simulation must be executed with the OC cover closed.
∗ If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
<Canceling - when [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed->
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
0
2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
EXECUTING...
07
43
01
OC cover float detection
margin setting (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)
Fusing temperature setting
(Normal copy)
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) When the level is
acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** OK
3) When the level is not
acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** ERR
[Function]
For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF/RSFP scanning position saved in
"41-06: (OC cover float detection level adjustment)", if the number of pixels between the markers when processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it
is judged as the float error.
When the set value of this simulation is "0," no float error occurs.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201), and press
[START] key. The setting is saved and the display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
Setting range: 0 – 99 (Copes with margin 0 – 99 pixels.)
Default: 30 (30 pixels)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.
[Function]
Used to set the fusing temperature of 3rd or later sheet. (For 1st and 2nd sheets, simulation 4314 is used.)
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key
(or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/
[START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
The [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is used to select
the mode.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
Set temperature (°C)
170
175
180
185
190
Remark
Code
5
6
7
8
Set temperature (°C)
195
200
205
210
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed
TRAY1
Manual paper feed
MFT
* The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
Mode
Remark
Default
Display item
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed
& 2nd cassette paper feed setting>
43-01 FU TEMP
TRAY1
6( 0-8 )
2) [
][
] key: Mode selection
43-01 FU TEMP
MFT
6( 0-8 )
3) [Numeric] key: Value entry
43-01 FU TEMP
MFT
6( 0-8 )
4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key
Settles the entered value. The display is
shifted to the sub code input standby
menu.
AR-203E/5420
1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to
change the mode.
2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value.
3) Press [START] key to fix the code
number.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 17
Main
code
43
Sub
code
04
Contents
Details of function/operation
Fusing temperature setting
in multi copy
[Function]
For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the
temperature set with simulation 43-01 to the temperature set with this simulation.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code
number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Set temperature (°C)
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
Remark
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
TRAY1
Mode
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd
cassette paper feed
Manual paper feed
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd
cassette paper feed (small-size)
Manual paper feed (small-size)
MFT
TRAY1 SH
MFT SH
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
Default
3
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
3
1
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
1
∗ The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
05
Fusing temperature setup in
duplex copy (AR-M201 only)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.
[Function]
In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this simulation is applied to the fusing
temperature.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
Code Shift temperature (°C)
0
±0
1
–8
2
–6
3
–4
4
–2
14
Fusing start temperature
setting
Remark
Default
Code Shift temperature (°C)
5
±0
6
+2
7
+4
8
+6
9
+8
Remark
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is started, the currently set code number is displayed.
Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the setting, and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The machine goes to the
sub code entry standby mode.
Code Set temperature (°C)
0
160
1
165
2
170
3
175
4
180
5
185
Remark
Code Set temperature (°C)
6
190
7
195
8
200
9
205
10
210
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 18
Remark
Default
Main
code
46
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Copy density adjustment
(300dpi)
[Function]
Copy density is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode.
The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99)
The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation.
Mode
AE mode (300dpi)
TEXT mode (300dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
(300dpi)
TS mode (AE)
(300dpi)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
TSAE
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Default
50
50
50
50
50
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display
4) To fix the set value without printing, press
[OK]/[ENTER] key.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 62( 1-99)
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 50( 1-99)
2) [
] key: Mode selection
* To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,
press any key.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
TSAE 100% 50( 1-99)
2) [
* When performing the AE mode exposure
adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is
not covered.
] key: Mode selection
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
TEXT 100% 50( 1-99)
AR-203E/5420
1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to
change the mode.
3) [Numeric] key: Value entry
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 62( 1-99)
2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value.
4) [START] key: Fixing and printing value
(No change on the LCD)
3) [START] Fixing and printing value
* Print is started in the set mode.
* Print is started in the set mode.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 62( 1-99)
02
Copy density adjustment
(600dpi)
[Function]
Copy density is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode.
The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99)
Mode
AE mode (600dpi)
TEXT mode (600dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
(600dpi)
TS mode (AE)
(600dpi)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
TSAE
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19
Display lamp
Default
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
Main
code
46
Sub
code
12
Contents
Details of function/operation
Density adjustment in the
FAX mode (Collective
adjustment) (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value
and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value.
All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value.
For the density adjustment table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (density adjustment (Normal
text) in the FAX mode).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED
of [START] key is turned off.
AUTO
XX
("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of
normal text stored on the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value.
ADJUST
EXP.
AUTO
YY
ADJUST
SCAN
EXP.
AUTO
YY
4) Print is started (self print).
ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
AUTO
YY
After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
display.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
13
FAX mode density
adjustment (Normal text)
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored
data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value.
Density adjustment value data table
Mode
STD (Normal text)
Fine (Fine text)
Sfine (Super fine)
Photo
off
on
off
on
off
Exposure adjustment value
When initializing each data: 50
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
STD
XX
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the
FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [Numeric] key.
ADJUST
EXP.
STD
YY
3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED
of [START] key is turned off.
ADJUST
SCAN
EXP.
STD
YY
4) Print is started (self print).
ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
STD
YY
After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
display.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
14
FAX mode density
adjustment (Fine text)
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density
adjustment (Normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
3) Scan start (self print)
FINE
XX
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on
the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [Numeric] key.
ADJUST
EXP.
ADJUST
SCAN
EXP.
FINE
YY
4) Print start (self print)
ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
AUTO
YY
After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
display.
FINE
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20
Main
code
46
Sub
code
15
Contents
Details of function/operation
FAX mode density
adjustment (Super fine)
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density
adjustment (Normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
3) Scan start (self print)
ADJUST
SCAN
S-FINE
XX
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on
the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [Numeric] key.
ADJUST
EXP.
EXP.
S-FINE
YY
4) Print start (self print)
ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
S-FINE
YY
After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
display.
S-FINE
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
18
Image contrast adjustment
(300dpi)
[Function]
Contrast is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the
mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1
– 99)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE mode (300dpi)
AE
TEXT mode (300dpi)
TEXT
PHOTO mode
PHOTO
TS mode (TEXT)
TSTXT
(300dpi)
TS mode (AE)
TSAE
(300dpi)
Mode
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
* No density display on LCD/display.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 21
Display lamp
Default
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
Main
code
46
Sub
code
19
Contents
Details of function/operation
Exposure mode setup
[Function]
<γ table setting>
When this simulation is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed.
(Default: 2)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [Exposure mode
selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the
EEPROM.
<AE operation mode>
] key for the AR-M200/
When setting the γ table, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
M201) to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [Exposure
mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write
into the EEPROM.
<PHOTO image process setting>
When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed in AE
operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image process setting and the
code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed. (Default: 1)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press
[Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode
and write into the EEPROM.
Mode
Display item
Display lamp
Code
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) number
1
γ
GAMMA
OFF
2
20
SPF/RSPF exposure
correction (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)
AE
AE
AE
PHOTO
PHOTO
PHOTO
0
1
1
2
Setting content
Image quality priority
mode
Toner consumption
priority mode
Lead edge stop
Real time process
Error diffusion process
Dither process
Remark
Default
Default
Default
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.
[Function]
Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the SPF/RSPF mode. The adjustment is
made by adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy.
When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy
becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99)
Mode
RSPF/SPF
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
SPF
Display lamp
(AR-203E)
TEXT mode lamp
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 22
Default
50
Remark
Main
code
46
Sub
code
29
Contents
Details of function/operation
Image contrast adjustment
(600dpi)
[Function]
Contrast is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode.
The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE mode (600dpi)
AE
TEXT mode (600dpi)
TEXT
PHOTO mode
PHOTO
TS mode (TEXT)
TSTXT
(600dpi)
TS mode (AE)
TSAE
(600dpi)
Mode
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Default
50
50
50
50
50
* No density display on LCD/display.
30
AE limit adjustment
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save).
Change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM.
The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
By pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201), setting is
changed. (Setting range: 0 – 31, Default: 0)
Mode
Limit value for AE
Limit value for AE (toner save)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Remark
<Remark>
When simulation 26-06 (Destination setting) or simulation 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is
changed, the setting of this simulation is also changed to the default in connection.
31
Image sharpness
adjustment
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-19.
[Function]
Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode.
Image quality
Blurring
Standard
Sharpening
Setting No
0
1
2
Remark
Default
When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 1)
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions.
To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/
M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display.
Mode
AE mode
TEXT mode
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
TS mode (AE)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
TSAE
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 23
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Default
1
1
1
1
1
Main
code
46
Sub
code
32
Contents
Details of function/operation
Copier color reproduction
setup
[Function]
Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be
copied can be switched.
Set value
0
1
2
Colors easy to be copied
Purple, Blue, Red
Water blue, Green, Blue
Yellow, Red, Green
Colors difficult to be copied
Yellow, Green, Water blue
Purple, Red, Yellow
Blue, Water blue, Purple
* This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 0)
Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are
changed for used in copying.
To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/
M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display.
Specification component
Green
Red
Blue
Mode
AE mode
(including TS)
TEXT mode
(including TS)
PHOTO mode
39
FAX mode sharpness
adjustment (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
Setting No
0
1
2
Remark
Default
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT
PRINT mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
0
PHOTO
SCAN mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
0
Default
0
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value,
and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
Sharpness adjustment value data table
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Mode
STD
FINE
S-FINE
FINE/PHOTO
S-FINE/PHOTO
Sharpness adjustment value
When initializing each data: 1
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SHARPNESS SETTING
PRESS ←,→
2) [
][
] key or after 2sec
4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [Numeric]
key.
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2)
Y
Every time when [
] key is pressed,
the second line is changed in the
sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 →
1.
("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment
value.)
When [
] key is pressed, the sequence
is reversed.
5) Scan start (self print)
SHARPNESS SET (1-5)
1:STD
3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of
[START] key is lighted.
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2)
X
("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD,
FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/
PHOTO.)
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to “2)” display.
SHARPNESS SETTING
SCAN
Y
6) Print start (self print)
SHARPNESS SETTING
PRINT
Y
After completion of printing, returns to “4)”
display.
("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on
the FAX side.)
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to “2)” display.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24
Main
code
48
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Front/rear (main scanning)
direction and scan (sub
scanning) direction
magnification ratio
adjustment
[Function]
Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201). Press
[START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (When the adjustment value is increased
by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)
][
]
Display item
LED
Display lamp
Default
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420)
Main scan direction
F-R
PRINT mode
TEXT mode lamp
50
magnification ratio
lamp
OC mode sub scan
SCAN
SCAN mode
PHOTO mode
50
direction magnification ratio
lamp
lamp
Mode
05
SPF/RSPF mode sub scan
direction magnification ratio
in copying (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to display the current SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD/
display.
When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a
copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by
0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)
][
]
When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex → Single," single copies of two sheets are
performed.
For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level,
Density mode = MANUAL
Density level = 3
Mode
Sub scan magnification
ratio adjustment on the
front surface of SPF/RSPF
document
Sub scan magnification
ratio adjustment on the
back surface of RSPF
document (AR-M200/
M201)
Display item
LED
Display
Initial value of
(AR-M200/ (AR-M200/
lamp
duplex setting
M201)
M201)
(AR-203E)
S-S
SIDE1
COPY mode AE mode
lamp
lamp
D-S
SIDE2
PRINT
mode lamp
* When there is no document in SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 25
—
Default
50
50
Main
code
49
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Flash ROM program writing
mode
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, "d" is displayed on the display (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is
displayed on the LCD for the AR-M200/M201), the machine goes into the program writing mode
from PC to Flash ROM.
Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program.
During writing, the display shows as follows:
After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.
AR-M200/M201
Status
Download data receiving
Loader function transfer
Date delete start
Data write (Boot section)
Data write (Program
section)
Data write (EEPROM)
Data write (LCD)
During SUM CHECK
During BOOT SUM
CHECK
During EEPROM SUM
CHECK
Download complete
Display item
AR-203E/5420
Pre-heat
Ready
lamp
lamp
"d" ON
ON
OFF
Remark
Display
RECEIVING
LOADER COPYING
FLASH ERASE
BOOT WRITING
PROGRAM WRITING
E2PROM WRITING
LCD DATE WRITING
FLASH ROM SUM
CHECK
BOOT SUM CHECK
AR-M200/M201
"d" ON
"d" ON
"d" ON
OFF
Blink
Blink
ON
OFF
Blink
AR-M200/M201
AR-M200/M201
"d" ON
ON
ON
AR-M200/M201
EEPROM SUM CHECK
DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!
Error state
AR-M200/M201
"0FF" ON
OFF
OFF
"E ∗" ON
OFF
OFF
AR-203E/5420
* "∗" in an error display indicates the error position.
1
2
3
4
5
Data reception error
Loader function transfer
FLASH ROM delete
FLASH ROM writing (Boot section)
FLASH ROM writing (Program section)
6
7
8
9
10
Sum check (Loader section)
Sum check (Boot section)
Sum check (Program section)
Sum check (EEPROM section)
Data error
In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD.
(AR-M200/M201)
Error status
PC data receiving
Loader function transfer
FLASH ROM delete
Boot section FLASH ROM write
Program section FLASH ROM write
Loader section SUM CHECK
Boot section SUM CHECK
Program section SUM CHECK
E2PROM SUM CHECK
E2PROM write
E2PROM read Verify
E2PROM collating Verify
Boot section lens check
Program section lens check
E2PROM lens check
Total data size check
IMC communication error
IMC FRASH ROM write
LCD section lens check
LCD section FLASH ROM write
LCD section SUM CHECK
Display item
E-01 PC TRANS
E-02 LOADER COPY
E-03 FLASH ERASE
E-04 BOOT WRITE
E-05 PROGRAM WRITE
E-06 LOADER SUM
E-07 BOOT SUM
E-08 PROGRAM SUM
E-09 E2PROM SUM
E-10 E2PROM WRITE
E-11 E2PROM READ
E-12 E2PROM COLLATE
E-13 BOOT LENGTH
E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH
E-15 E2PROM LENGTH
E-16 DATE SIZE
E-17 IMC TRANS
E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE
E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH
E-20 LCD DATE WRITE
E-21 LCD DATE SUM
To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a simulation. With the power OFF, press and hold [Clear All] key + [
] key, turn on the power.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
DOWNLOAD MODE
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26
Main
code
50
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Lead edge image position
[Function]
Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The
adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed
in 2 digits. (Center value: 50)
When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed, the
setting mode and the display are changed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the
paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by
0.1mm.)
Mode
Print start position (Main
cassette paper feed)
(*) Print start position
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void
amount
Image scan start position
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
TRAY1
TRAY2
MFT
DEN-A
RRC-A
Image rear edge void
amount (Cassette paper
feed)
DEN-B
Image rear edge void
amount (Manual paper
feed)
RRC-B
LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
Manual feed lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Manual feed lamp
Default
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
* When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Adjustment procedure]
1) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON)
(B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at
100%. (AR-203E/5420)
For the AR-M200/M201, the following LED’s are lighted:
• AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A)
• TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B)
• PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C)
2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.
Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead
edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).
4) Set the lead edge void amount to
B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
(Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm
When the value of B is increased by
10, the void is extended by about
0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however,
the void amount is regarded as 0.)
∗ The SPF/RSPF adjustment is made
by adjusting the SPF/RSPF image
scan start position after OC
adjustment.
Image loss, R = 4mm
5mm
10mm
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation
46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27
Main
code
50
Sub
code
06
Contents
Details of function/operation
Copy lead edge position
adjustment (SPF/RSPF)
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
[Function]
Used to adjust the SPF/RSPF copy lead edge.
When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the
scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm.
The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position.
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)
][
]
When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the SPF/
RSPF by pressing [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key.
Mode
Front surface
document scan
position adjustment
Back surface
document scan
position adjustment
(AR-M200/M201)
Rear edge void
adjustment (RSPF)
Initial value
of duplex
setting
S-S
Display item
(AR-M200/
M201)
SIDE1
LED
(AR-M200/
M201)
COPY mode
lamp
D-S
SIDE2
PRINT mode
lamp
S-S
END
SCAN mode
lamp
Display lamp
(AR-203E)
AE mode
lamp
—
PHOTO
mode lamp
Default
50
50
50
∗ When there is no document in the SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
10
Center offset adjustment
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning
document.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When
the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the
center is shifted to left.
The modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the
AR-M200/M201).
When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to
cause black streaks on the edges. When the SPF/RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the
SPF/RSPF by [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key.
Mode
Print center offset
(Main cassette
paper feed)
(*) Print center offset
(2nd cassette paper
feed)
Print center offset
(Manual paper feed)
(**) 2nd print center
offset (Main cassette
paper feed)
Display item
LED
Display lamp
Default
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201)
(AR-203E/5420)
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
AE mode lamp
50
Main cassette lamp Main cassette lamp
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
50
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed
lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
Manual paper feed
lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
50
SIDE2
50
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
(**): For Simplex models, skip.
* When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC
regardless of duplex setting.
* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 28
Main
code
50
Sub
code
12
Contents
Details of function/operation
Document off-center
adjustment
[Function]
Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
[
] key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)
]
When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left.
Mode
Platen document scan
SPF document front
scan
RSPF document back
scan (AR-M200/M201)
Initial value Display item
LED
of duplex
(AR-M200/
(AR-M200/
setting
M201)
M201)
S-S
OC
COPY mode
lamp
S-S
SPF
PRINT mode
lamp
D-S
RSPF
SCAN mode
lamp
Display lamp
(AR-203E/
5420)
AE mode
lamp
TEXT mode
lamp
—
Default
50
50
50
* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
18
Memory reverse position
adjustment in duplex copy
(Only the AR-M201, or the
AR-M200 with the RSPF
installed)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set correction value is displayed.
Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 – 99, Default: 50)
For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy
operation is performed from the rear edge of documents.
When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows:
In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image.
When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference
position is on the rear edge, and use this simulation to adjust the set value so that the print lead
edge is matched.
Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data
from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data
position stored in memory by the set value of this simulation.
Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made
by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [
Mode
OC memory reverse
output position
(AR-M201 only)
SPF/RSPF memory
reverse output position
Initial value of
duplex setting
S-D
][
Display item
D-S
LED
Default
OC
COPY mode
lamp
50
SPF
PRINT mode
lamp
50
Document transport direction
Scan lead edge
Document transport direction
Print lead edge
Lead edge void (1)
Print start position
Scan end position
(Default: Scan cut by void (1))
Scan direction
] key.
Rear edge void
Print rear edge
Scan rear edge
* The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the
simplex model.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 29
Main
code
50
Sub
code
19
Contents
Details of function/operation
Duplex copy rear edge void
adjustment
(AR-M201 only)
[Function]
Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value:
50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [
][
] key. (Adjustment range; 1 –
99)
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The
paper information is cleared for every copy.)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm.
Mode
Paper rear edge void amount
Print start position (Duplex back surface)
Display item
DEN-B
RRC-D
LED
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Default
50
50
* The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the
RSPF setting.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
51
02
Resist quantity adjustment
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the SPF/RSPF resist roller
onto paper. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
[
] key for the AR-M200/M201).
]
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
Display item
LED
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201)
Main cassette
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
Main cassette lamp
(*) 2nd cassette
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
2nd cassette lamp
Manual paper feed
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed
lamp
RSPF document
SIDE1
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
PRINT mode lamp
(Front surface)
SCAN mode lamp
(AR-M200/M201)
Main cassette lamp
RSPF document
SIDE2
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
PRINT mode lamp
(Back surface)
Main cassette lamp
(AR-M200/M201)
(*) Duplex back
DUP-2
PRINT mode lamp
surface
SCAN mode lamp
(AR-M201 only)
Main cassette lamp
Mode
Display lamp
Default
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
50
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
50
2nd cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
50
Manual paper feed lamp
—
50
—
50
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 30
50
Main
code
53
Sub
code
08
Contents
Details of function/operation
SPF/RSPF scan position
automatic adjustment (Only
the AR-203E/M200/M201
with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
[Function]
Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the SPF/RSPF scan glass and the OC glass
together, and close the SPF/RSPF.
When this simulation is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display.
* Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm
* If the values are kept as the default values, SPF/RSPF scan is not performed properly. The
front area of the proper scan position may be scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the
SPF/RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The SPF/RSPF glass cover edge
position is calculated from the difference between the SPF/RSPF glass cover edge and the OC
side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed
again.
Mode
SPF/RSPF scan position
auto adjustment
SPF/RSPF scan position
manual adjustment
Display item
LED
Display lamp
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201)
(AR-203E)
AUTO
COPY mode lamp AE mode lamp
MANU
PRINT mode lamp TEXT mode lamp
Default
1
1
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. (In MANUAL)
OK/ERR display in AUTO
<When OK>
53-08 SPF AUTO
AUTO 100% **
61
03
Polygon motor check
(HSYNC output check)
<When ERR>
OK
53-08 SPF AUTO
AUTO 100% **
ERR
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is
rotated for 30sec.
At that time, the ZOOM lamp (or the COPY mode lamp for the AR-M200/M201) is lighted for
100msec every time when HSYNC is detected.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
61-03 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...
63
01
Shading check
[Function]
Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading.
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for
shading and the copy lamp is lighted.
When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one
pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD/display. (3 digits)
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
63-01 SHADING CHK
EXECUTING...
000
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 31
Main
code
63
Sub
code
02
Contents
Details of function/operation
Black level automatic
correction
[Function]
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance.
When this simulation is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit
hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the
density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of
the plate left center.
10
Chart back surface
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD/display.
* Default: 0
* If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
000
2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key:
Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is
pressed->
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub
code entry standby mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR
12
13
Light quantity stabilization
wait time setting
Light quantity stabilization
band setting
[Function]
Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the
light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the
target during the wait time, the set time of this simulation is ignored and the operation enters the
stable evaluation process.)
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
Setting range: 0 – 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 – 99sec.)
Default: 15 (15sec)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.
[Function]
When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level
sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is
within the range set with this simulation, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note: The
magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.)
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
Setting range: 1 – 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 – 99 in 4095 gradations.)
Default: 16
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 32
Main
code
64
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Self print (1by2 mode)
[Function]
The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the
print command is received from the host, printing is made.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since,
however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.)
Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to start paper feed from the
selected cassette and print in the selected pattern.
Code number
0
1
2
3
Pattern
1by2
Grid pattern
White paper
Black background
Display item
1 BY 2
CHECK
WHITE
BLACK
* For 4 – 99, flip.
66
01
FAX soft SW setting
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
Use to check the FAX soft SW setting.
Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ENTER FAX SOFT SW. #
(3 DIGITS)
SW.___
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To
enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.),
and the press [OK]/[ENTER] key.
No.###
CHANGE?
xxxxxxxx
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.
∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
display.
3) Select 1
No.###
xxxxxxxx
USE # KEY
12345678
4) Change with 1-8 of [Numeric] key and
the press [OK]/[ENTER] key.
No.###
STORED?
xxxxxxxx
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.
∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
display.
5) Select 1
STORED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
02
FAX soft SW initializing
(excluding the adjustment
values) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to initializing FAX soft SW.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
INITIALIZED
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 33
Main
code
66
Sub
code
03
Contents
Details of function/operation
FAX PWB memory check
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the FAX PWB memory.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT CHECK MEMORY
PRESS ←, →
2) [
][
] key or after 2sec
Every time when [
→ 2 → 3 → 1.
When [
] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT MEMORY (1-3)
1:DRAM
SELECT MEMORY (1-3)
2:SRAM
SELECT MEMORY (1-3)
3:FLASH
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
CHECKING MEMORY
4) After completion of check
• When the result is OK
• In case of address bus
check error
• In case of data bus check
error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT
OK
MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG
MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG
• In case of sum check error
• In case of data check error
• In case of erase check error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX SUM
NG
MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX DATA
NG
MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX ERASE NG
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
04
Signal send mode (Max.
value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value).
Facsimile simulation design specifications.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NO SIGNAL
33600bps(V34)
31200bps(V34)
28800bps(V34)
26400bps(V34)
24000bps(V34)
21600bps(V34)
19200bps(V34)
16800bps(V34)
14400bps(V34)
12000bps(V34)
9600bps(V34)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
7200bps(V34)
4800bps(V34)
2400bps(V34)
14400bps(V33)
12000bps(V33)
14400bps(V17)
12000bps(V17)
9600bps(V17)
7200bps(V17)
9600bps(V29)
7200bps(V29)
4800bps(V27ter)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS)
No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [
Pressing [
] key or [
No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL
][
] key / 2sec after
] key reverses the sequence.
.....
No. (1-35)
35:LINE ON HOOK
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 34
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
2400bps(V27ter)
300bps(FLAG)
2100Hz(CED)
1100Hz(CNG)
300bps(V21)
2100Hz(ANSam)
DUMMY RING
NO VOICE ANSWER
NO RING BACK TONE
LINE OFF HOOK
LINE ON HOOK
Main
code
66
Sub
code
05
Contents
Details of function/operation
Signal send mode (Soft SW
set value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value).
Facsimile simulation design specifications.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NO SIGNAL
33600bps(V34)
31200bps(V34)
28800bps(V34)
26400bps(V34)
24000bps(V34)
21600bps(V34)
19200bps(V34)
16800bps(V34)
14400bps(V34)
12000bps(V34)
9600bps(V34)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
7200bps(V34)
4800bps(V34)
2400bps(V34)
14400bps(V33)
12000bps(V33)
14400bps(V17)
12000bps(V17)
9600bps(V17)
7200bps(V17)
9600bps(V29)
7200bps(V29)
4800bps(V27ter)
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
2400bps(V27ter)
300bps(FLAG)
2100Hz(CED)
1100Hz(CNG)
300bps(V21)
2100Hz(ANSam)
DUMMY RING
NO VOICE ANSWER
NO RING BACK TONE
LINE OFF HOOK
LINE ON HOOK
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS)
No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [
Pressing [
] key or [
No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL
][
] key / 2sec after
] key reverses the sequence.
.....
No. (1-35)
35:LINE ON HOOK
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
07
Image memory content print
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to print the image memory content.
[Operation]
• When print is allowed
PRINT STORED
After completion of printing,
FAX control is terminated.
10
Image memory content clear
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
• When there is no print data
NO DATA
• When print is inhibited
CAN NOT PRINT
After 2 sec, FAX control is
terminated.
After 2 sec, FAX control is
terminated.
[Function]
Use to clear the image memory content.
[Operation]
• When there are some print data
CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY
After completion of memory clear, the buzzer
sounds.
CLEARED
PLEASE POWER OFF
• When there are no print data
CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY
After completion of memory clear
CLEARED
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Remains unchanged until the power is turned
off.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 35
Main
code
66
Sub
code
11
Contents
Details of function/operation
300bps signal send (Max.
value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ←, →
2) [
][
] key or after 2sec
Every time when [
] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
→ 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1.
When [
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL
.....
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
6:00001
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
12
300bps signal send (Soft
SW set value) (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ←, →
2) [
][
] key or after 2sec
Every time when [
] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
→ 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1.
When [
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL
.....
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
6:00001
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 36
Main
code
66
Sub
code
13
Contents
Details of function/operation
Dial test (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to the dial test.
[Operation]
■ Dial test (PULSE)
■ Dial test (DTMF)
1) Initial display
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE
2:DTMF
SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE
2:DTMF
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is
terminated.
2) Select 1
INPUT MAKE TIME
(0-15)
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2)
Select 2
SELECT HIGH LEVEL
1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
__
↓
3) Enter the make time in 2 digits.
INPUT DIAL #
XXXX
XXXX: Default
∗ After deleting with [Clear] key, input
can be made.
↓
3)
↓
Select 1
↓
∗ Select 2: Returns to “2)” display.
5) Select 1
Switched to 10/20PPS set with
pulse selection inside.
6) After setting
SENDING yyPPS xxms
7) After completion of sending
TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO
∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display.
8) Select 1
TERMINATED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
Select 2
INPUT VALUE
(0-15)
↓
SEND yyPPS xxms
1:YES 2:NO
"xx" is the input value.
__
SELECT LOW LEVEL
1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
4) [OK]/[ENTER] key
"yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20.
Select 2
INPUT VALUE
(0-15)
__
↓
4) Select 1
INPUT DIAL #
XXXX
XXXX: Default
∗ After deleting with [Clear] key, input can be
made.
4) [OK]/[ENTER] key
H:xx
1:YES 2:NO
L:yy
"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.
∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display.
5) Select 1
HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside.
6) After setting the signal send level
SENDING DTMF
7) After completion of sending
TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO
∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display.
8) Select 1
TERMINATED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
17
DTMF signal send (Max.
value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
INPUT DIAL #
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) [Numeric] key input
3) Communication is started after setting the
signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
The content selected with signal send
level selection is set inside.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 37
Main
code
66
Sub
code
18
Contents
Details of function/operation
DTMF signal send (Soft SW
set value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
3) Communication is started after setting the
signal send level.
INPUT DIAL #
SENDING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
∗ [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
2) [Numeric] key input
The content selected with signal send
level selection is set inside.
21
FAX information print
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to print the FAX information.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
PRESS ←, →
2) [
][
] key or after 2sec
Every time when [
→ 3 → 1.
When [
] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
1:USER SW. LIST
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
2:SOFT SW. LIST
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
3:PROTOCOL
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
• When print is allowed
PRINT STORED
After completion of printing,
FAX control is terminated.
24
FAST SRAM clear
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
• When print is inhibited
CAN NOT PRINT
After 2sec, FAX control is
terminated.
[Function]
Use to clear the FAST SRAM.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
2) After completion of clearing
CLEARED
CLEAR FAST SRAM
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
30
TEL/LIU status change
check (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the TEL/LIU status change.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
HS2 :xxx
RHS :xxx
HS1 :xxx
EXHS:xxx
↑
The display is switched every 2sec.
↓
CHECKING
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 38
Main
code
66
Sub
code
33
Contents
Details of function/operation
Signal detection check
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the signal detection.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
CHECKING
NONE
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following.
CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
34
Communication time
measurement (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)
[Function]
Use to measurement the communication time.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
COMM. TIME
xx:xx:xx:xxx msec
"xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
37
Speaker sound volume
setting (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the speaker sound volume.
1:
2:
3:
4:
NO SOUND
LOW
MID
HIGH
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SPEEKER VOL.
PRESS ←, →
2) [
][
] key or after 2sec
Every time when [
→ 3 → 4 → 1.
When [
] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT (1-4)
1:NO SOUND
SELECT (1-4)
2:LOW
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
STORED
xxx
xxx: Set content
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 39
.....
Main
code
66
Sub
code
38
Contents
Details of function/operation
Time setting/check
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the time setting.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT TO SET
1:DATE
2:TIME
∗ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 1
2) Select 2
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)
CHANGE?
1:YES 2:NO
xx:xx
CHANGE?
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No
revision of display)
"xx:xx" is the current value.
3)
3) Select 1
Select 1
INPUT YEAR
(4 DIGITS)____.__.__
∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
4) Enter the year in 4 digits.
INPUT HOUR
(0-24)
__:__
∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits.
INPUT MONTH
(1-12)
1998.__.__
INPUT MINUTE
(00-59)
5) Enter the month in 2 digits.
01:__
5) Enter minute in 2 digits.
INPUT DAY
(1-31)
1998.01.__
xx:xx
STORED?
6) Enter the day in 2 digits.
1:YES 2:NO
"xx:xx" is the current value.
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)
STORED?
1:YES 2:NO
∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value.
∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
7) Select 1
6) Select 1
STORED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
STORED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
67
50
USB receive speed
adjustment (USB1.1)
(AR-203E only)
Used to set the limitation on the print data receive speed of USB2.0 (Full speed) port (USB port
on the machine).
→ When print images from USB2.0 (Full speed) port are disturbed, change the setting and try
again.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.
Enter the code number corresponding to the adjustment value, and press [START] key to
change the setting.
Code number
1
2
3
4
Setting
FAST
NORMAL1
NORMAL2
SLOW
Speed
↑ Fast
↓ Slow
5. Trouble codes
A. Trouble codes list
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E1
00 IMC communication trouble
10 IMC trouble
13 IMC flash ROM error
81 IMC communication interface error (Parity)
82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun)
84 IMC communication interface error (Framing)
E7
01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory notdetected error
02 LSU trouble
10 Shading trouble (Black correction)
11 Shading trouble (White correction)
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
16 Abnormal laser output
F2
02 Toner supply abnormality
04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error)
F5
02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality
F6
10 FAX board trouble
H2
00 Thermistor open
H3
00 Heat roller high temperature detection
H4
00 Heat roller low temperature detection
L1
00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time
after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch
is locked)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 40
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L3
00 Scanner return trouble
L4
01 Main motor lock detection
32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
L6
10 Polygon motor lock detection
U1
03 FAX board battery error
U2
04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication
error)
11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
40 CRUM chip communication error
B. Details of trouble codes
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E1
00 Content IMC communication trouble
Detail
An abnormality occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
10 Content IMC trouble
Detail
An abnormality occurs in the IMC.
Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.
and
remedy
13 Content IMC flash ROM error
Detail
An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash
ROM.
Cause IMC abnormality
Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.
and
If downloading of the program is abnormally
remedy terminated, it may cause an error. Download
the program again to avoid this.
81 Content IMC communication interface error (Parity)
Detail
A parity error occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
E1
82 Content IMC communication interface error
(Overrun)
Detail
An overrun error occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
84 Content IMC communication interface error
(Framing)
Detail
A framing error occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory
not-detected error
Detail
The memory is not set properly or the
memory capacity is not set to the duplex
setup (6M).
Check Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2.
and
remedy
02 Content LSU trouble
Detail
The BD signal from the LSU cannot be
detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or
always ON)
Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or
disconnection
Polygon motor rotation abnormality
Laser beams are not generated.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Check Check connection of the LSU connector.
and
Execute SIM 61-03 to check the LSU
remedy operations.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
normally.
Check that the laser emitting diode
generates laser beams.
Replace the LSU unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction)
Detail
The CCD black scan level is abnormal when
the shading.
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
cable
CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable.
and
Check the CCD unit.
remedy
11 Content Shading trouble (White correction)
Detail
The CCD white scan level is abnormal when
the shading.
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
cable
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference
white plate
Copy lamp lighting abnormality
CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
(When occurred in the SPF/RSPF scan
position.)
Improper installation of the mirror unit
Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference
and
white plate.
remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of
the copy lamp (SIM 05-03).
Check the MCU PWB.
16 Content Abnormal laser output
Detail
When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is
detected.
Cause Laser abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality.
Check Check the laser emitting diode operation.
and
Replace the MCU PWB.
remedy
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 41
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
F2
02 Content Toner supply abnormality
Detail
The maximum toner supply time is greatly
exceeded.
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Improper developing unit
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Replace the developing unit.
remedy
04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life
cycle error)
Detail
The destination of the main unit differs from
that of the CRUM.
When the life cycle information is other than
Not Used (FFh).
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Improper developing unit
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Replace the developing unit.
remedy
F5
02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality
Detail
The copy lamp does not turn on.
Cause Copy lamp abnormality
Copy lamp harness abnormality
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check Use SIM 5-3 to check the copy lamp
operations.
and
remedy When the copy lamp lights up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the copy lamp does not light up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the copy lamp unit and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
F6
10 Content FAX board trouble
Detail
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB
Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection
Defective harness between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB
Motherboard connector pin breakage
FAX control PWB ROM error/Data error
IC on FAX PWB causes abnormality
Check Check connector/harness of FAX control
and
PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
Replace the FAX PWB.
H2
00 Content Thermistor open
Detail
The thermistor is open.
The fusing unit is not installed.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection
The fusing unit is not installed.
Check Check the harness and the connector
and
between the thermistor and the PWB.
remedy Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
H3
00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection
Detail
The fusing temperature exceeds 240°C.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection.
Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and
blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp keeps ON.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
H4
00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection
Detail
1) When the target temperature (165°C) is
not reached in 55 sec after starting
warming-up.
2) When the temperature below 100°C is
detected for 300ms under the ready print
state.
∗ "Starting warming-up" means not only that
in power supply but also reset that in reset
from shut-off and in side door close. (The
timing of generating H4 is not limited to
that in power supply.)
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Heater lamp abnormality
Thermostat abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and
blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp does not light up.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and the thermostat. Check the interlock
switch.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 42
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L1
00 Content Feeding is not completed within the
specified time after starting feeding. (The
scan head locking switch is locked)
Detail
The white area and the black marking on the
shading plate are used to obtain the
difference in the CCD level values for
judgment of lock. When the difference in the
levels of which and black is small, it is judged
that the black mark could not be scanned by
lock and the trouble code "L1" is displayed.
Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch.
Mirror unit abnormality
The scanner wire is disconnected.
The origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock
and
switch is released.
remedy Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror
reciprocating operations.
When the mirror does not feed.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Check the harness and the connector
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror does feed.
Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
L3
00 Content Scanner return trouble
Detail
When the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing
after turning on the power, the mirror home
position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
Or when the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (about 6 sec) after start of
copy return, the mirror home position sensor
(MHPS) does not turn ON.
Cause Mirror unit abnormality
Scanner wire disconnection
Origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror
and
reciprocating operations.
remedy When the mirror does not return.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Check the harness and the connector
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror does feed.
Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
L4
01 Content Main motor lock detection
Detail
When the main motor encoder pulse is not
detected for 100 msec.
Cause Main motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection the
main motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 25-01 to check the main motor
and
operations.
remedy Check connection of the main motor
harness/connector.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L4
32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
Detail
The error detection is started after 2 sec
from starting rotation of the exhaust fan
motor.
1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is
not detected for 1 sec after starting
detection.
2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan)
detects the HIGH level (unstable) after
detection the lock state (stable state).
Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection
trouble
Exhaust fan motor trouble
MCU PWB trouble
Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection
and
check
remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement
Replace the MCU PWB.
L6
10 Content Polygon motor lock detection
Detail
The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does
not return within a certain time (about 20
sec) from starting the polygon motor
rotation.
Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection of the
polygon motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 61-1 to check the polygon motor
and
operations.
remedy Check connection of the polygon motor
harness/connector.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
U1
03 Content FAX board battery error
Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
PWB falls.
Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
PWB falls.
Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery.
and
Replace the battery.
remedy
U2
04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial
communication error)
Detail
EEPROM access process error
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and
Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
Detail
Check sum error of the counter area in the
EEPROM
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and
Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
40 Content CRUM chip communication error
Detail
An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip
communication.
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Defective contact of developing unit
MCU PWB trouble
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Check installation of the developing unit.
remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Replace the MCU PWB.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 43
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.)
Section
Developing
Process peripheral
Parts
Developer
DV blade
DV side seal (F/R)
DV doctor
Drum
25K
50K
75K
: Clean
100K
: Replace
125K
: Adjust
✩: Lubricate
Remark
White streaks are made on the image.
2. Maintenance display system
Toner
Life
Remaining quantity
LED
Machine
Life
LED
Machine
Developer
8K
EMPTY
NEAR EMPTY
About 12.5%
ON
Operation allowed
Flash
Stop
25K
ON at 25K of the developer count.
Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup.
(If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.)
∗ Default: Not Stop
Maintenance
∗ Clear: SIM 24-06
Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1.
∗ Default: 25K
LED
∗ Clear: SIM 20-1
Not stop.
Machine
Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter.
3. Remaining toner indication
TONER FULL
Display for users
Remaining toner indication
100%
75%
Lo
50%
LOW LEVEL
25%
100-76%
75-51%
50-26%
25-13%
12.5% or less
• The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor.
• The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor.
• The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 MAINTENANCE 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM
The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the
use conditions.
3) To enter the toner save mode, press the light (
) key. The
light and dark indicator marked "1" will light up, indicating the
toner save mode is selected.
1. Functions that can be set with user
programs
Toner save mode
Reduces toner consumption by approximately 10%.
Power save modes
The unit has two power save modes of operation: preheat mode
and auto power shut-off mode.
Preheat mode
When the unit enters the preheat mode, the power save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators will remain on or off as
before. In this condition, the fuser in the unit is maintained at a
lower heat level, thereby saving power. To copy from the preheat
mode, make desired copier selections and press the start (
)
key using the normal copying procedure.
Auto power shut-off mode
When the unit enters the auto power shut-off mode, the power
save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators except the
ONLINE indicator will go out. The auto power shut-off mode saves
more power than the preheat mode but requires a longer time
before starting copying. To copy from the auto power shut-off
mode, press the start (
) key. Then make desired copier selections and press the start (
) key using the normal copying procedure.
Auto clear
The unit returns to the initial settings a preset amount of time after
the end of job.
This preset amount of time (auto clear time) can be changed.
Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode
You can set the copy resolution used for AUTO and MANUAL
(
) exposure mode.
2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420)
1) Press the exposure mode selector key to select the MANUAL
(
) mode.
4) Press the exposure mode selector key. The PHOTO (
)
indicator will stop blinking and light up steadily. The light and
dark indicator marked "3" will light up. The toner save mode is
now active.
Note: To return to the standard mode, repeat the procedure but
use the dark (
) key to select exposure level "5" in step
3).
3. User programs (AR-203E/5420)
The user programs allow the parameters of certain functions to be
set, changed, or canceled as desired.
Set the power save modes, auto clear time, preheat mode,
SPF automatic original discharge time, resolution of AUTO &
MANUAL mode and reset factory setting.
1) Press and hold down the light (
) key simultaneously for
more than 5 seconds until all the alarm indicators
(
,
,
, ) blink and "
" appears in the display.
2) Use the left copy quantity (
) key to select a user program
number (1: Auto clear time, 2: Preheat mode, 3: Auto power
shut off mode, 4: Auto power shut off timer, 6: SPF automatic
original discharge time, 10: Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL
mode, 21: Reset factory, 24: Prevention of OC copies when
the SPF is up function, 25: Copy effective paper width setting
function (Bypass tray), 26: Copy effective paper width setting
function (Tray), 28: Selection of copy start state (Polygon rotation on/off), 29: Fusing temperature setting when the bypass
tray is used). The selected number will blink in the left side of
the display.
3) Press the start (
) key. The entered program number will be
steadily lit and the currently selected parameter number for the
program will blink on the right side of the display.
4) Select the desired parameter using the right copy quantity
(
) key. The entered parameter number will blink on the
right of the display.
Program
Mode
No.
1
Auto clear time
2) Press and hold down the exposure mode selector key for
approximately 5 seconds. The MANUAL (
) indicator will
go out and the PHOTO (
) indicator will begin to blink. The
light and dark indicator marked "5" will light up, indicating the
standard toner mode is active.
2
3
4
6
10
21
24
Parameters
1 → 10 sec., 2 → 30 sec.,
*3 → 60 sec., 4 → 90 sec.,
5 → 120 sec., 6 → OFF
Preheat mode
*1 → 30 sec., 2 → 60 sec.,
3 → 5 min., 4 → 30 min.,
5 → 60 min., 6 → 120 min.,
7 → 240 min.
Auto power shut off mode *1 → ON, 2 → OFF
Auto power shut off timer *1 → 5 min., 2 → 30min.,
3 → 60 min., 4 → 120 min.,
5 → 240 min.
SPF automatic original
1 → 5 min., *2 → 30 min.,
discharge time
3 → 60 min., 4 → 120 min.,
5 → 240 min., 6 → OFF
Resolution of AUTO &
*1 → 300dpi, 2 → 600dpi
MANUAL mode
Reset factory
1 → YES, *2 → NO
Prevention of OC copies
*1 → ON, 2 → OFF
when the SPF is up
function
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 1
Program
Mode
No.
25
Copy effective paper width
setting function (Bypass
tray)
26
Copy effective paper width
setting function (Tray)
28
Parameters
*1 → Large (A4 width/
LETTER), 2 → Small (B5R
width/INVOICE)
*1 → Large (A4 width/
LETTER), 2 → Small (B5R
width/INVOICE)
*1 → ON, 2 → OFF
Selection of copy start
state (Polygon rotation on/
off)
Fusing temperature
1 → Low, *2 → High
setting when the bypass
tray is used
29
3) Press the [
] key [
] or [
ting of the selected item.
] key [
] to change the set-
• See "1. User programs" for the program code.
PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN
1
2
2
1
2
1
PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN
2
1
NOTE:
• If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [Clear] key
(
) and repeat the procedure from step 2).
∗ Factory default settings are indicated with an asterisk (*).
• To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.
5) Press the start (
) key. The right-hand number in the display
will be steadily lit and the entered value will be stored.
4)
Note: To change the setting or to set another mode, press the
clear key. The unit will return to step 2).
6) Press the light (
) key to return to the normal copy mode.
4. User programs (AR-M200/M201)
Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.
Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen
appears.
NOTE:
When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and
the [OK]/[ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure
adjustment screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the
[OK]/[ENTER] key.
1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.
In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply
pressing the [MENU] key.
MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM
1
2
2
1
2
1
MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM
2
1
] or [
] key [
] to select the item
2) Press the [
] key [
that you wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and
then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.
• See "1. User programs" for the program name and program
code.
• You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys.
USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE
1
2
2
1
2
1
USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE
Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base
setting beep)
The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key
entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid
key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base
setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base
setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting
beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting
beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH
SOUND".
The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:
Key entry beep: One beep
Base setting beep: Three beeps
Invalid key beep: Two beeps
Base settings
The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy
setting. The base settings are as follows:
Copy ratio: 100%
Light and Dark level: Center
2
1
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 2
Paper feed location:
Tray 1 (Upper paper tray)
AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO
A. Copy mode
Program
number
Program name
Setting codes
(factory default setting
appears in bold)
Explanation
1
AUTO CLEAR
1: 10 SEC.
2: 30 SEC.
3: 60 SEC.
4: 90 SEC.
5: 120 SEC.
6: OFF
• Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings
if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy
job.
• This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also
be disabled.
2
PREHEAT MODE
1: 30 SEC.
2: 1 MIN.
3: 5 MIN.
4: 30 MIN.
5: 60 MIN.
6: 120 MIN.
7: 240 MIN.
• This function automatically switches the machine to a low power
consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine
being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up,
however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation
automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an
original is placed, a print job is received.
3
AUTO SHUT-OFF
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode.
4
AUTO SHUT-OFF
TIME
1: 5 MIN.
2: 30 MIN.
3: 60 MIN.
4: 120 MIN.
5: 240 MIN.
• This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes
even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses
without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the
power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the
[START] key ( ). Normal operation also resumes automatically when a
print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto
power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key ( )) can be used.
7
LAYOUT IN 2IN1
1: PATTERN 1
2: PATTERN 2
• Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are
copied onto a single sheet of paper.
8
OFFSET
FUNCTION
1: ON
2: OFF
• When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the
output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode.
9
ROTATE ORIG.
IMAGE
(AR-208D only)
1: ON
2: OFF
• When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on
the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the
top (tablet binding).
10
AE/TEXT
RESOLUTION
1: 300dpi
2: 600dpi
• This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT
mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is
slower when high-quality mode is used.
11
2-SIDED COPY
MODE
(AR-208D only)
1: HI-SPEED
2: NORMAL
• If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL"
can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in
a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast
two-sided copying.
12
MARGIN WIDTH
1: 1/4"
2: 1/2"
3: 3/4"
4: 1"
• Use this setting to set the margin width.
13
MEM. FOR
PRINTER
1: 30%
2: 40%
3: 50%
4: 60%
5: 70%
• Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer
mode.
14
AUTO KEY REPEAT
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes
repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to
decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [
] key (
) or
[
] key (
)), this program can be used to have the set value not
change when the key is held down.
15
KEY PRESS TIME
1: NORMAL
2: 0.5 SEC.
3: 1.0 SEC.
4: 1.5 SEC.
5: 2.0 SEC.
• Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be
accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being
changed by the accidental pressing of a key.
16
KEY TOUCH
SOUND
1: LOW
2: HIGH
3: OFF
• This sets the volume of beep signals.
17
SOUND AT
DEFAULT
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected.
18
TONER SAVE
MODE
1: ON
2: OFF
• This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save
mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 3
Setting codes
(factory default setting
appears in bold)
Program
number
Program name
19
AE LEVEL ADJUST
1: SPF/RSPF
(Adjustment to 5 levels
is possible.)
2: DOCUMENT GLASS
(Adjustment to 5 levels
is possible.)
• This is used to adjust the exposure level.
• The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document
glass and the RSPF.
• For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric
values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center.
20
LANGUAGE
1: AMERICAN ENGLISH
2: ENGLISH
3: FRENCH
4: SPANISH
:
:
• This is used to set the language used in the display.
21
RESET FACTORY
1: Yes
2: No
• This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings.
22
SORT AUTO
SELECT
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode.
24
CHECK RSPF
OPEN
1: ON
2: OFF
• You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key ( ) is
pressed when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the
multi-bypass paper feed is used.)
25
VALID COPY
WIDTH
1: 8.5x11
2: 5.5x8.5
• Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When
"5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up
to invoice size.
28
LSU SETTING
1: ON
2: OFF
• Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating,
or also when the polygon motor is stopped.
29
PAPER TYPE
1: PLAIN PAPER
2: HEAVY PAPER
• Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used.
Normally "HEAVY PAPER" should be selected.
30
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
1: LIGHTER
2: LIGHT
3: NORMAL
4: DARK
5: DARKER
• Set the contrast of the display.
Explanation
B. Print mode
Program
number
Program name
Setting codes
(factory default setting
appears in bold)
Explanation
1
FORCED OUTPUT
1: ON
2: OFF
• When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically
continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out
in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode.
2
USB 2.0 MODE
SWITCH *1
1: FULL-SPEED
2: HI-SPEED
• This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when
using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the
system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this
program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting
should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver.
3
AUTO TRAY
SWITCH*2
1: ON
2: OFF
• If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in
another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the
bypass tray). The function can be disabled.
*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.
*2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 4
CCD Driver
MCU-PWB
5V
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1
12V
Driver
24V
A
G
C
A5V
USB I/F
Sensor/SW
PAPD,PPD3,
PD2,CED2
Mechanical load
CPFS2
MainMotor
USB1T20
Scanner CLK(48MHz)
2nd Cassette
(AR-203E Optional only)
Fan Motor
(2speed with Lock detect)
C
D
S
Printer CLK
(18.3856MHz)
R
G
B
/MMD
CCD
(ILX558X)
NF
AFE(HT82V24)
MMCLK
USB2.0
FullSpeed
(expect for
AR-5420)
5V
M
P
X
/MMRDY
12V
AD
8bits(MSB/LSB)
5V
Mirror Motor
Driver
(296pin)
KRONOS ASIC
Reg
Toner Motor
Driver
3.3V
16bits
3.3V
LASER
LSU
PWM
HC151
MHPS
POWER SUPPLY
AC Code
/POFF,HL,PR
FW
3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V
PSW
TC, GRID, MC, BIAS
HVU
EEPROM
(CRUM)
I2C Bus
8Kbyte
EEPROM
SELIN1,2,3
KEYIN1,2
PSL
ONL
OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
I2C Bus
Driver
SPF Motor (AR-203E optional only)
CPU CLK(19.6608MHz)
SSCG
CPU
H8S/2321
(19.6608MHz)
System Reset
16Mbyte
or 8Mbyte
SDRAM
HOME
POSITION
SENSOR
SRAM
1Mbit
Flash ROM 16Mbit
D[15…0]
A[19…1]
Reset IC
3.3V
Polygon
Motor
DC-DC
0 - 24V
Lamp Inverter
for CCFL
CCFL x 2
PMD
CCD PWB
PMCLK
Carriage Unit
HC151 x 2
PSL LED
ONL LED
OPE PWB
16bit
LED Driver
LED
Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
Drum Initial detector
PPD1
POD
MFD
PPD2
SPOD
PD1
START KEY
KEY Matrix
CPU I/O
CPU INTERRUPT
SPPD
Sensor/SW
(Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)
MPFS,RRS,CPFS1
Mechanical Load
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram
A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420)
Fan Motor
Shifter Motor
Duplex Motor
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 2
Driver
Driver
A
G
C
18.3856MHz
Printer CLK
/MMD
Sensor/SW
PPD3,
PD2, CED2
M
P
X
/MMLD
Main Motor
Mechanical load
CPFS2
Driver
24V 12V
2nd Cassette
Duplex Model Only
C
D
S
SSCG
Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz)
MCU-PWB
CCD Driver
R
G
B
A5V
MMCLK
5V
CCD
(ILX558K)
Reg
AFE(HT86V26)
12V
Mirror Motor
Driver
LSU
LASER
D[15…0]
A[19…1]
Reset IC
3.3V
Polygon
Motor
OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
EEPROM
I2C Bus
8Kbyte
UART
/ESPRD
Driver
POWER SUPPLY
AC Code
HVU
TC, GRID, MC, BIAS
EEPROM
(CRUM)
D[7..0]
RD
CS
INT
LCD E
LCD RS
LCD R/W (TBD)
LCD DB7-4
PSW
KEYSCAN1 - 3
SELIN1,2,3
KEYIN
SDRAM
256Mbx2
PSL
RSPF Motor (AR-M200/M201 optional only)
CPU CLK (19.6608MHz)
SSCG
/POFF,HL,PR
FW
3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V
D[15…8]
CPUCLK
MHPS
CPU
H8S/2321
(19.6608MHz)
System Reset
Image BUS(PI-Bus)
Image BUS(PO-Bus)
SDRAM
8Mbyte
HOME
POSITION
SENSOR
SRAM
1Mbit
Flash ROM 16Mbit
8
8
IO ASIC
DC-DC
0 - 24V
Lamp Inverter
for CCFL
CCFL x 2
PWM
8bits (MSB/LSB)
KRONOS ASIC
(296pin)
Toner Motor
Driver
3.3V
AD
16bits
3.3V
PMRDY
PMD
12V
PMCLK
Carriage Unit
8Mb
or 16Mb
OA982
P-Bus
8bit
LCD
(2 x 20)
START KEY
Speaker
Buzzer
KEY Matrix
LED
18.3856MHz
ISP1583
12MHz
LED Driver
HC238
(3 to 8 decode) 8bit
HC151
PSL LED
OPE PWB
Flash ROM
FAX I/F
FAX Main PCBA
AR-FX13 (Option)
NW PWB
Network Box
100Base-T
AR-NB2A
(Option)
AR-FX13
CPU I/O
LED
SPID
SRJD
SCOD
Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
Drum Initial detector
PPD1
POD
MFD
PPD2
CPU INTERRUPT
SPPD
Sensor/SW
(Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)
KEY Matrix
FAX OPE PWB
FAX Model Only
Ethernet
(RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC
MPFS,RRS,CPFS1
Mechanical Load
B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201)
USB2.0
High-speed
24V
P-GND
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 3
1
2
3
4
5
MPFS
SOLENOID
PPD1
CED1
D-GND
CASSETTE PAPER
SOLENOID
RESIST ROLLER
SOLENOID
TONER MT
CED1
LD
- HSYNC
D-GND
+5V
D-GND
- LDEN
- VIDEO
- S/H
D-GND
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
POLYGON MT
MAIN MT
INT24V
PGND
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK
POD
1
2
3
4
5
DSW
CN16
1 LEDPPD1
2 PPD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-R
DHAI-0289QSZZ
CN15
1 24V
2 24V1(DSWS)
B2P-VH-R
CN26
24V
/MPFS
5䌖
MFD
DGND
B5B-PH-K-R
CN7
1 CED1
2 D-GND
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-K
1
2
3
B3B-PH-K-S
CN10
24V
/CPFS1
1
2
3
B3B-PH-K-E
CN12
24V
/RRS
CN23
1 TMA_O
2 TMB_O
B2P-VH
CN6
1 INT24V
2 PGND
3 /MMD
4 MMLD
5 /MMCLK
B5B-PASK-1
DHAI-0269QSZZ
DHAI-0514QSPZ
CN25
1
2 PD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-M
CN41
1 24V
2 P-GND
3 /PMD
4 PMRDY
5 PMCLK_A
B05B-CZHK-B
CN19
1 LEDPOD
2 POD
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S
CN11
1 VFMOUT
2 FANLK
3 /VFMCNT
4 PGND
B4B-PH-K-S
CN22
1 LEDPPD2
2 PPD2
3 D-GND
4 RTH_IN
5 D-GND
B5B-PH-K-S
DHAI-0529QSPZ
DHAI-0272QSZZ
DHAI-0287QSZZ
CN42
1 /SYNC
2 D-GND
3 INT5V
4 D-GND
5 /LDEN
6 /VIDEO
7 SHOLD
8 D-GND
B08B-CZHK-B
1
2
1
2
3
DHAI-0530QSPZ
DHAI-0286QSZZ
RTH_IN
D-GND
1
2
Thermistor
Fan MT
LEDPPD2
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
DHAI-0519QSPZ
PPD2
MCU
PWB
CN1
D-GND
9
P-GND
10
D-GND
11
3.3VIN
12
EN5V
13
3.3VIN
14
5V
15
/POFF
16
12VIN
17
24V
18
FW
19
24V
20
/PR
21
HLOUT
22
P-GND
23
P-GND
24
B24B-PNDZS-1
1
2
3
4
/BIAS
5
/TC
6
/GRIDL
7
/MC
8
B24B-PNDZS-1
CN1
INT5V
INT24V
CN5
24V
1
TCS
2
DVSEL
3
D-GND
4
B4B-PH-K-R
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN5
5VEN
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
PGND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
CN3
P-GND
1
P-GND
2
VCL
3
VCL
4
12V
5
12V
6
EN5V
7
D-GND
8
(VSAMP)
9
CCD-TG
10
D-GND
11
CCD-RS
12
(BSAMP)
13
CCD-CP
14
(AFE_SDI)
15
CCD_PHI2
16
D-GND
17
CCD_PHI1
18
(AFE_SEN)
19
(ADCLK)
20
D-GND
21
(AFE_SCK)
22
(AFE_DB7)
23
mt_at_home
24
(AFE_DB5)
25
(AFE_DB6)
26
D-GND
27
(AFE_DB4)
28
(AFE_DB3)
29
30
(AFE_DB2)
31
(AFE_DB1)
32
(AFE_DB0)
FF4-32-S15D5
CN4
OUTA+
1
OUTB+
2
OUTA3
OUTB4
B4B-PH-K-R
CN2
D-GND
1
KEYIN1#
2
SELIN3
3
STROBE
4
SELIN1
5
OP-CLK
6
SELIN2
7
OP-LATCH
8
OP-DATA
9
EN5V
10
D-GND
11
PSL
12
ONL
13
PSW
14
KEYIN2#
15
5V
16
DRST
17
D-GND
18
IMSA-9619S-18A
DHAI-0525QSPZ
DHAI-0516QSPZ
DHAI-0268QSZ4
DHAI-0513QSPZ
P-GND
P-GND
VCL
VCL
12V
12V
EN5V
D-GND
(VSAMP)
CCD-TG
D-GND
CCD-RS
(BSAMP)
CCD-CP
(AFE_SDI)
CCD_PHI2
D-GND
CCD_PHI1
(AFE_SEN)
(ADCLK)
D-GND
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_DB7)
MHPS
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
D-GND
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)
CN304
D-GND
KIN1
SELIN3
OP-STB
SELIN1
OP-CLK
SELIN2
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
5VEN
D-GND
PSL
ONL
PSW
KIN2
5V
DRST
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
D-GND
P-GND
D-GND
3.3VIN
EN5V
3.3VIN
5V
/POFF
12VIN
24V
FW
24V
/PR
HLOUT
P-GND
P-GND
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MC
INT5V
INT24V
BIAS
F-GND
DHAI-0526QSPZ
VCL
P-GND
L
N
HLN
HLL
BC
TC
MCFB
GRID
MC
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
OPE
PWB
CCD
PWB
HVT PWB
POWER
SUPPLY
PWB
CRUM
2 5VEN
4 (CRUMSDA)
3 (CRUMSCL)
1 PGND
P18-FX-4S-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
BIAS
AC-INLET
L
N
PGND
DHAI-0536QSPZ
DHAI-0267QSPZ
DHAI-0292QSZZ
DHAI-0273QSZZ
DHAI-0515QSPZ
1
2
6
5
8
1
2
1
2
6
5
8
INVERTER
PWB
HLL
HLN
SCANNER
UN
SCANNER MT
AC-CORD
1
2
TCS
CL
CL
DHAI-0537QSPZ
DV
un
HL
THERMOSTAT
2. Actual wiring diagram
A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420)
1
2
3
4
5
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 4
MPFS
SOLENOID
PPD1
CED1
PD1
CED1
D-GND
CASSETTE PAPER
SOLENOID
RESIST ROLLER
SOLENOID
TONER MT
MAIN MT
INT24V
PGND
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
POLYGON MT
24V
P-GND
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A
LD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DHAI-0519QSPZ
- HSYNC
D-GND
+5V
D-GND
- LDEN
- VIDEO
- S/H
D-GND
FAX Model only
POD
Duplex Model only
DUPLEX MT
SHIFTER MT
Fan MT
Thermistor
PPD2
D-GND
LEDPPD2
PPD2
D-GND
CN27
24VSFTMT
/SFTMT_0
/SFTMT_1
/SFTMT_2
/SFTMT_3
DSW
CN24
1 LEDPPD1
2 PPD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-R
DHAI-0289QSZZ
CN10
1 24V
2 24V1(DSWS)
B2P-VH-R
CN14
1
24V
2
/MPFS
3
5䌖
4
MFD
DGND
5
B5B-PH-K-R
CN21
1 CED1
2 D-GND
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-K
CN15
1 24V
2 /CPFS1
3
B3B-PH-K-S
CN18
1 24V
2 /RRS
3
B3B-PH-K-E
CN25
1 TMA_O
2 TMB_O
B2P-VH
CN12
1 INT24V
2 PGND
3 /MMD
4 MMLD
5 /MMCLK
B5B-PASK-1
CN28
1
2 PD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-M
DHAI-0269QSZZ
DHAI-0514QSPZ
DHAI-0423QSZZ
CN41
1 24V
2 P-GND
3 /PMD
4 PMRDY
5 PMCLK_A
B05B-CZHK-B
CN26
1 LEDPOD
2 POD
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S
CN20
1 24VDupMT
2 /DMT_0
3 /DMT_1
4 /DMT_2
5 /DMT_3
B05B-XASK-1
1
2
3
4
5
CN16
1 VFMOUT
2 FANLK
3 /VFMCNT
4 PGND
B4B-PH-K-S
CN11
1 LEDPPD2
2 PPD2
3 D-GND
4 RTH_IN
5 D-GND
B5B-PH-K-S
DHAI-0529QSP1
DHAI-0272QSZZ
DHAI-0287QSZZ
CN42
1 /SYNC
2 D-GND
3 INT5V
4 D-GND
5 /LDEN
6 /VIDEO
7 SHOLD
8 D-GND
B08B-CZHK-B
2
1
2
3
DHAI-0530QSP1
DHAI-0286QSZZ
2
1
2
3
MCU
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
CN2
D-GND
9
P-GND
10
D-GND
11
3.3VIN
12
EN5V
13
3.3VIN
14
5V
15
/POFF
16
12VIN
17
24V
18
FW
19
24V
20
/PR
21
HLOUT
22
P-GND
23
P-GND
24
B24B-PNDZS-1
CN2
INT5V
1
INT24V
2
P-GND
3
P-GND
4
/BIAS
5
/TC
6
/GRIDL
7
/MC
8
B24B-PNDZS-1
CN6
24V
1
TCS
2
DVSEL
3
D-GND
4
B4B-PH-K-R
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN7
5VEN
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
D-GND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
CN4
P-GND
1
P-GND
2
VCL
3
VCL
4
12V
5
12V
6
EN5V
7
D-GND
8
(VSAMP)
9
CCD-TG
10
D-GND
11
CCD-RS
12
(BSAMP)
13
CCD-CP
14
(AFE_SDI)
15
CCD_PHI2
16
D-GND
17
CCD_PHI1
18
(AFE_SEN)
19
(ADCLK)
20
D-GND
21
(AFE_SCK)
22
(AFE_DB7)
23
mt_at_home
24
(AFE_DB5)
25
(AFE_DB6)
26
D-GND
27
(AFE_DB4)
28
(AFE_DB3)
29
(AFE_DB2)
30
31
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)
32
FF4-32-S15D5
CN22
OUTA+
1
OUTB+
2
OUTA3
OUTB4
B4B-PH-K-R
CN3
D-GND
BL
INFOLED
OP_LATCH
D-GND
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
PSW
PSL
DRST
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDE
LCDRS
LCDCONT
BZR
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
KEYIN
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
D-GND
EN5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
VCC3
D-GND
DHAI-0525QSPZ
DHAI-0525QSPZ
DHAI-0516QSPZ
DHAI-0268QSZ4
DHAI-0517QSPZ
P-GND
P-GND
VCL
VCL
12V
12V
EN5V
D-GND
(VSAMP)
CCD-TG
D-GND
CCD-RS
(BSAMP)
CCD-CP
(AFE_SDI)
CCD_PHI2
D-GND
CCD_PHI1
(AFE_SEN)
(ADCLK)
D-GND
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_DB7)
MHPS
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
D-GND
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)
CN302
D-GND
BL
INFOLED
OP_LATCH
D-GND
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
PSW
PSL
DRST
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDE
LCDRS
LCDCONT
BZR
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
KEYIN
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
D-GND
EN5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
VCC3
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
D-GND
P-GND
D-GND
3.3VIN
EN5V
3.3VIN
5V
/POFF
12VIN
24V
FW
24V
/PR
HLOUT
P-GND
P-GND
INT5V
INT24V
P-GND
P-GND
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MC
BIAS
F-GND
DHAI-0526QSPZ
L
N
HLN
HLL
HVT PWB
MC
1
2
1
BC
1
2
3
1
1
4
1
1
2
TC
MCFB
GRID
CCD
PWB
VCL
P-GND
CN301
F-KEYSC3
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYIN7
F-KEYIN6
F-KEYIN5
F-KEYIN4
F-KEYIN3
F-KEYIN2
F-KEYIN1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
DATA1
D-GND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
BIAS
DHAI-0267QSPZ
DHAI-0292QSZZ
DHAI-0273QSZZ
1
2
6
5
8
CN3
AC VOUT
GND
INVERTER
PWB
CN2
AC VOUT
GND
DHAI-0515QSPZ
1
2
6
5
8
CN401
15 F-KEYSC3
14 F-KEYSC2
13 F-KEYSC1
12 F-KEYIN7
11 F-KEYIN6
10 F-KEYIN5
9 F-KEYIN4
8 F-KEYIN3
7 F-KEYIN2
6 F-KEYIN1
5 LED_V3
4 LED_V2
3 LED_V1
2 DATA1
1 D-GND
HLL
HLN
DHAI-0491QSZZ
AC-INLET
For 200V area
AC-CORD
For 120V area
1
2
1
3
1
3
SCANNER
Carriage
UN
SCANNER
MT
DHAI-0543QSPZ
DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area)
DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
LCD_OPE
PWB
POWER
SUPPLY
PWB
CRUM
2 5VEN
4 (CRUMSDA)
3 (CRUMSCL)
1 P-GND
P18-FX-4S-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
DV
un
HL
THERMOSTAT
AC-CORD
DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area)
DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area)
TCS
CCFL
CCFL
FAX_OPE
PWB
FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only
B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201)
C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only)
MCU
PWB
CN24
24VSPFMT
24VSPFMT
SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
SPID
DGND
LEDSPID
SPPD
DGND
LEDSPPD
B12B-PH-K-S
DHAI-0532QSP1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
2
4
6
3
1
COMA
COMB
A
/A
B
/B
1
2
3
SPID
DGND
LEDSPID
SPID
1
2
3
SPPD
DGND
LEDSPPD
SPPD
SPMT
SPF UNIT
D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only)
MCU
PWB
CN30
LED_SRJD
DGND
SRJD
LED_SPPD
DGND
SPPD
LED_SCOD
DGND
SCOD
LED_SPID
DGND
SPID
24VSPFSOL
SPUS
24VSPFSOL
SRVC
SPMT_3
24VSPFMT
SPMT_1
SPMT_0
24VSPFMT
SPMT_2
24VSPFSOL
NC
DHAI-0533QSPZ
DHAI-0541QSPZ
1
3
5
2
4
6
7
9
11
8
10
12
17
19
21
23
14
22
16
20
24
18
13
15
3
2
1
1
2
LED_SRJD
D-GND
SRJD
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
LED_SPPD
D-GND
SPPD
3
2
1
3
2
1
LED_SPID
D-GND
SPID
3
2
1
1
2
24V
SRVC
1
2
LEDSRJD
DGND
SRJD
SRJD
DHAI-0540QSPZ
3
2
1
LEDSPPD
DGND
SPPD
SPPD
3
2
1
LEDSCOD
DGND
SCOD
SCOD
3
2
1
LEDSPID
DGND
SPID
SPID
1
2
24V
_SPUS
DHAI-0539QSPZ
B24B-PNDZS-1
SPUS
RSPF UNIT
SRVC
1
2
3
4
5
6
/B
COMB
B
A
COMA
/A
SPMT
E. 2nd cassette unit (AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only)
2
1
CPFS2
PPD3
5V
PPD3
D-GND
3
2
1
PD2
PD2
D-GND
1
2
CED2
CED2
D-GND
1
2
/CPFS2
24V
2
1
DHAI-0442QSZZ
14
13
11
8
7
6
4
2
1
9
12
10
5
3
/CPFS2
24V
5V
PPD3
D-GND
PD2
D-GND
CED2
D-GND
FG
1
2
4
7
8
9
11
13
14
6
3
5
10
12
DHAI-0441QSZZ
AR-203E: CN18
AR-M200/AR-M201: CN19
1 /CPFS2
2 24V
4 5V
7 PPD3
8 D-GND
11 PD2
12 D-GND
13 CED2
14 D-GND
3
5
6
9
10
B14B-PHDSS-B
MCU PWB
2nd CASSETTE UN
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 5
F. Network box and FAX (AR-M200/M201 optional only)
FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only
DHAI-0538QSPZ
CN5
1 MODEM_IN
2 D-GND
3 MCU_D6
4 MCU_D7
5 MCU_D4
6 MCU_D5
7 MCU_D2
8 MCU_D3
9 MCU_D0
10 MCU_D1
11 MCU_nCS
12 /RD
13 PB_DATA7
14 MCU_INT
15 PB_DATA5
16 PB_DATA6
17 PB_DATA3
18 PB_DATA4
19 PB_DATA1
20 PB_DATA2
21 PB_ADDR7
22 PB_DATA0
23 PB_DATA5
24 PB_ADDR6
25 PB_ADDR3
26 PB_ADDR4
27 PB_ADDR1
28 PB_ADDR2
29 PB_NCS1
30 PB_ADDR0
31 PB_NWE
32 PB_NAE0
33 FAX_RST
34 PB_NOE
35 24V
36 MDM_IRQ
37 VCC3
38 EN5V
39 D-GND
40 P-GND
MCU
PWB
To
LAN
CN8
TPTX+
TPTXTPRX+
NC
NC
TPRXNC
NC
ST_LED
5V
LK_LED
5V
PJ1
VCC
GND
USB Cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VBUS
DD+
GND
FG
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
CN2
MODEM_IN
D-GND
MCU_D6
MCU_D7
MCU_D4
MCU_D5
MCU_D2
MCU_D3
MCU_D0
MCU_D1
MCU_nCS
/RD
PB_DATA7
MCU_INT
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_ADDR7
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_NCS1
PB_ADDR0
PB_NWE
PB_NAE0
FAX_RST
PB_NOE
24V
MDM_IRQ
VCC3
EN5V
D-GND
P-GND
CN3
1 BT1
2 LT1
B02B-PH-K-S
Speaker
FAX
Main
PWB
MJ2
1 BT1
2 LT1
3 TEL1
4 TEL2
5 LT2
6 BT2
To
TEL
Communication
Line
MJ1
1 NC
2 NC
3 L1
4 L2
5 NC
6 NC
To
TEL
Communication
Line
CN1
5V
DD+
GND
FG
CN9
NW Box
PWB
2
3
1
2
AC adapter
L
N
DHAI-0544QSPZ
1
2
CN3
1 L
3 N
POWER
SUPPLY
PWB
AR-NB2A Optional Model only
3. Signal name list
Signal name
(ADCLK)
(AFE_DB0)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
(AFE_DB7)
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_SDI)
(AFE_SEN)
(BSAMP)
(VSAMP)
/BIAS
/CPFS1
/CPFS2
/DMT_0
/DMT_1
/DMT_2
/DMT_3
/FAX_RST
/GRIDL
/LDEN
/MC
/MDM_IRQ
/MMCLK
/MMD
/MPFS
/PMD
/POFF
/PR
Name
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
HV bias signal
1st CS pickup solenoid
2nd CS pickup solenoid
DUP motor
DUP motor
DUP motor
DUP motor
FAX PWB reset signal
HV grid signal
Laser
HV MC signal
FAX PWB interrupt
Main motor
Main motor
Multi bypass solenoid
Polygon motor
Low voltage power
Heater lamp
Function/Operation
AFE control signal
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
AFE control signal
AFE serial data
AFE control signal
AFE control signal
AFE control signal
HV bias drive
DUP motor phase control
DUP motor phase control
DUP motor phase control
DUP motor phase control
Main charger grid control
Laser circuit control signal
Main charger control
Clock signal to the polygon motor
Polygon motor drive signal
Polygon motor drive signal
Output power control
Power relay control
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 6
Section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Process section
Paper transport section
2nd cassette section
Duplex drive section
Duplex drive section
Duplex drive section
Duplex drive section
FAX optional section
Process section
LSU
Process section
FAX optional section
Main drive section
Main drive section
Paper transport section
LSU
Power section
Power section
Signal name
/RD
/RRS
/RSV_SOL
/SFTMT0
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT3
/SPUS
/SRVC
/SYNC
/TC
/VFMCNT
/VIDEO
BZR
CCD_PHI1
CCD_PHI2
CCD-CP
CCD-RS
CCD-TG
CED1
CED2
DVSEL
FANLK
FW
HLOUT
KEYIN
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
LCDCON
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
LEDPOD
LEDPPD1
LEDPPD2
LEDSCOD
LEDSPID
LEDSPID
LEDSPPD
LEDSPPD
LEDSRJD
MCU_D0
MCU_D1
MCU_D2
MCU_D3
MCU_D4
MCU_D5
MCU_D6
MCU_D7
MCU_INT
MCU_NCS
MHPS
MMLD
MODEM_IN
ONL
OP_CLK
OP-DATA
OP-LATCH
OUTAOUTA+
Name
Control signal
1st transport solenoid
Reverse solenoid
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Paper feed solenoid
Reverse clutch
Laser
HV TC signal
Fan speed signal
Laser
Buzzer signal
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
Machine cassette detection
2nd CS cassette detection
Developing tank detection
Fusing fan
Low voltage power
Heater lamp
Key scan input
Key scan output
Key scan output
Key scan output
LCD control signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD control signal
LCD control signal
POD sensor power
PPD sensor power
PPD2 sensor power
SCOD sensor power
SPID sensor power
SPID sensor power
SPPD sensor power
SPPD sensor power
SRJD sensor power
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
MCU interrupt
Control signal
MHPS sensor
Main motor
FAX connection detection signal
Online LED
LED driver control
LED driver control
LED driver control
Scanner motor
Scanner motor
Function/Operation
MCU bus control signal
Shifter motor phase control
Shifter motor phase control
Shifter motor phase control
Shifter motor phase control
Horizontal sync signal from the LSU
Transfer charger grid control
Fan rotation speed control
Laser drive signal
Buzzer
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
Fan lock detection signal
Zero cross detection
Heater lamp control
Key detection control
Key scan output
Key scan output
Key scan output
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
Carriage HP detection
Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
Scanner motor phase control
Scanner motor phase control
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 7
Section
FAX optional section
Paper transport section
RSPF section
Shifter motor section
Shifter motor section
Shifter motor section
Shifter motor section
RSPF section
RSPF section
LSU
Process section
Optical section
LSU
Operation section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Paper transport section
2nd cassette section
Developing section
Optical section
Power section
Power section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Paper exit section
Paper transport section
Fusing section
RSPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
Optical section
Main drive section
FAX optional section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Optical drive section
Optical drive section
Signal name
OUTBOUTB+
PB_ADDR0
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7
PB_NAE0
PB_NCS1
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
PD1
PD2
PMCLK_A
PMRDY
POD
PPD1
PPD2
PPD3
PSL
PSW
RTH_IN
SCOD
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
SHOLD
SPID
SPID
SPMT_0
SPMT_0
SPMT_1
SPMT_1
SPMT_2
SPMT_2
SPMT_3
SPMT_3
SPPD
SPPD
SRJD
STROBE
TCS
TMA_O
TMA_O
TMB_O
TMB_O
USB +D
USB -D
VCL
VFMOUT
Name
Scanner motor
Scanner motor
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Control signal
Control signal
Control signal
Control signal
PD SW sensor
PD2 SW sensor
Polygon motor
Polygon motor
POD sensor
PPD sensor
PPD2 sensor
PPD3 sensor
Power save LED
Start button control
Thermistor
SCOD sensor
Select signal
Select signal
Select signal
Laser
SPID sensor
SPID sensor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
SPPD sensor
SPPD sensor
SRJD sensor
LED driver control
Toner sensor
Toner motor
Toner motor
Toner motor
Toner motor
USB signal
USB signal
Copy lamp
Fusing fan
Function/Operation
Scanner motor phase control
Scanner motor phase control
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
1st CS paper width sensor
2nd CS paper width detection
Clock signal to the polygon motor
Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
Paper transport detection
Paper transport detection
Paper transport detection
2nd CS paper transport detection
Fusing section thermistor temperature detection
RSPF cover open sensor
HC151 select signal
HC151 select signal
HC151 select signal
Laser APC signal
RSPF UN paper entry sensor
SPF UN paper entry sensor
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF transport detection
SPF transport detection
RSPF paper exit sensor
Toner quantity detection
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control
Copy lamp control
Fan drive signal
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 8
Section
Optical drive section
Optical drive section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
Paper transport section
2nd cassette section
LSU
LSU
Paper exit section
Paper transport section
Fusing section
2nd cassette section
Operation section
Operation section
Fusing section
RSPF section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
LSU
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
Operation section
Developing section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
USB section
USB section
Scanner unit section
Optical section
A
B
C
0J
680J
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
15pF
15pF
0J
27pF
27pF
R3(*2)
C5(*5)
C1(*6)
CPU3.3
5
(2) /CS2
(3) /CS1
(3) /CS0
(8) PSL
(2) /SCANSP
(2) /SCANST
(2) /TRANSST
(5) PMCLK
(4) SPFMT3
(4) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(4) SPFMT1
(4) SPFMT0
*R3,R4,C1, and C5 are temtative
OPEN
22J
R8(*4)
0J
R6
TP255
N.M.
R2
10u/16V
C19
PSL
TP2
+
TP231
TP232
TP233
TP234
TP235
TP236
TP237
TP238
(3) RY/BY
33Jx4
BR21
VCC3
4
3
2
1
/CS3#
/CS2#
/CS1#
/CS0#
TP245
TP240
TP241
TP242
TP243
TP244
TP246
(8) ONL
(4) (KEYIN2)
(2) /PRINTST
(2,3) /RD
(3) /HWR
(2) /LWR
TP257
1
8
5
2
R18 /SCANSP# TP239
33J
/MSU_ST1
/ES_PAGE
0J (1608)
XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS
CY25811SC
VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1
IC1
L1
ZJSR5101-223(open)
L11
7
6
4
3
C5
IC2
4
R12
R13
R14
ONL
(KEYIN2)
/ESSRDY
RY/BY
TP222
TP224
TP226
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
100J
R8
R7
X1
HC-49U/S
19.6608MHz
R4
/PRINTST
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#
*4
*3
*1
TP131
TP132
AVcc
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
AVss
Vss
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0
MD0
MD1
MD2
PG0/CAS
PG1/CS3
PG2/CS2
*5
TP256
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
*2
C1
*6
TP1
R9
TP218 R10
TP220 R11
R3
Spreading Range : +/- 1.2%
5
TP248
6
TP154 7
8
TP155
SPFMT3
SPFMT2/MIRCNT
SPFMT1
SPFMT0
/SCANST
/TRANSST
C11
N.M.
(4) (KEYIN1)
(5) RTH
(5) (TCS_AN)
(4) (SIN1)
(4) (SIN2)
(4) (SIN3)
TP253
0.1u
C2
(4) SELIN3
(4) SELIN2
(4) SELIN1
N.M.
R5
TP254
N.M.
R1
VCC3
C14
N.M.
R4(*1)
0.1u
C20
33p
C7
R7(*3)
0.1u
C21
33p
C8
C13
N.M.
D
0.1u
C22
C12
22pF
33p
C9
C15
N.M.
TP229
NOT mounted
0.1u
C23
BR22
33Jx4
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
12p
C6
C78
100p
EXTAL
XTAL
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)
TP156
TP157
TP158
TP159
A0
A1
A2
A3
mounted
TP247
TP228
TP227
TP225
TP223
TP221
TP219
TP7
TP216
BR25
33Jx4
TP160
1
TP161
2
TP162
3
TP163
4
TP164
TP165
TP166
TP167
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
8
7
6
5
TP168 1
TP169 2
TP170 3
TP171 4
TP172
TP173
TP174
TP175
When IC1 is,
0.1u
C24
8 BR23
7 33Jx4
6
5
1
2
3
4
MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-203E/5420)
0.1u
C25
BR24
8
7 33Jx4
6
5
BR26
8
7 33Jx4
6
5
1
2
3
4
TP176
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 9
A20
R16
33J
TP230
CPUCLK(NC)
TP217
EXTAL
XTAL
TP215
TP214
(2,4)
/RESET1
/STBY
TP213
NMI
TP212
TP211
/WDTOVF
TP210
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
P53/ADTRG
P52/SCK2
Vss
Vss
P51/RxD2
P50/TxD2
PF0/BREQ
PF1/BACK
PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
PF7/0
Vss
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3
P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5
P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1
P61/TEND0/CS5
Vss
Vss
P60/DREQ0/CS4
Vss
PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0
Vss
NC
VCC
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
Vss
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9
PB2/A10
PB3/A11
Vss
PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
Vss
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
Vss
Vss
P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0
1
2
3
4
5
TP133 6
TP134 7
TP135 8
TP136 9
10
TP137 11
TP138 12
TP139 13
TP140 14
TP141 15
TP142 16
TP143 17
TP144 18
19
TP145 20
TP146 21
TP147 22
TP148 23
TP149 24
TP150 25
TP151 26
TP152 27
28
TP153 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
3
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
A[20..0] (2,3)
TP252
TP249
TP251
TP250
TP261
TP178
TP177
H8S/2321
P35/SCK1
P34/SCK0
P33/RxD1
P32/RxD0
P31/TxD1
P30/TxD0
VCC
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
Vss
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
Vss
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VCC
3
CPU3.3
TP209
TP208
TP207
TP206
TP205
TP204
TP203
TP202
TP201
TP200
TP199
TP198
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TP24
TP25
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP125
TP126
TP127
TP128
TP129
TP130
CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
1
2
3
4
TP6
TP8
TP9
TP10
/CS5
BR19
33Jx4
BR18
33Jx4
8 BR20
7 33Jx4
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8 BR17
7 33Jx4
6
5
MCNT
STROBE
CRUMSCL
CRUMSDTA
DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
MMCLK
RESETOUT1
ARB_INT (2)
(FW) (4)
CPU_SYNC (2)
mt_at_home# (4)
CCD_TG (2,4)
(SPPD) (7)
(PSW) (7)
TP182
TP181
TP180
TP179
TP190
TP189
TP188
TP187
TP186
TP185
TP184
TP183
TP194
TP193
TP192
TP191
TP195
TP196
TP197
MCNT (5)
D_CONT (4)
STROBE (4)
CRUMSCL (12)
CRUMSDTA (12)
DMT0 (6)
DMT1 (6)
DMT2 (6)
DMT3 (6)
MMCLK (5)
D3
D2
D1
D0
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D15
D14
D13
D12
2
2
100p
100p
D[15..0]
R19
10kJ
C4
C3
(2,3)
SCL
RxD
SDA
TxD
POFF
DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
10kJx4
BR1
1
2
3
4
10kJx4
BR14
RESETOUT1
8
7
6
5
VCC3
8
7
6
5
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10kJx4
BR10
10kJx4
BR8
10kJx4
BR5
10kJx4
BR2
CT
3
4
R22
10kJ
R21
33J
C26
47p
TP258
0.01uF
C17
TP259
ASIC_RESET
BU4212F
GND
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
TP260
C18
N.M.
VCC3
R20
100kJ
Reset Circuit
D3
D2
D1
D0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D11
D10
D9
D8
D15
D14
D13
D12
VDD VOUT
IC3
10kJ(open)
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
(USB_IN) (4)
SCL (3)
RxD (9)
SDA (3)
TxD (9)
POFF (2,5)
1
2
3
4
10kJx4
BR12
10kJx4
BR7
R245
R246
R247
R248
1
2
3
4
SPFMT3
4
SPFMT2/MIRCNT 3
SPFMT1
2
SPFMT0
1
RY/BY
/ESSRDY
(KEYIN2)
TP263
MCNT
/CS5
CRUMSCL
/PRINTST
/STBY
NMI
/WDTOVF
TP262
C10
1uF
4
C16
0.1u
5
1
1
10kJx4
BR11
10kJx4
BR6
10kJx4
BR3
/ASIC_RST (2,4,12)
/RESET0 (2,3,4)
R421
STROBE
10kJx4
BR16
10kJx4
BR15
R17
R261
R262
R263
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
R249
R250
R251
R252
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
/ES_PAGE
/MSU_ST1
RxD
CRUMSDTA
(SIN1)
(SIN2)
(SIN3)
(KEYIN1)
/TRANSST
/SCANST
/SCANSP#
TP267
POFF
TxD
SDA
SCL
CPUCLK(NC)
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
CCD_TG
/CS0#
/CS1#
/CS2#
/CS3#
VCC3
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
N.M._10kJ
10kJ
2kJ
2kJ
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
1/12
A
B
C
D
4. Circuit diagram
A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420)
A
B
C
33J
8
10kJx4
8 RAMDB11
7 RAMDB10
6 RAMDB9
5 RAMDB8
BR48
1
2
3
4
L10
VCC3
TP449
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
BR45
1
2
3
4
0J (1608)
C74
N.M.
R47
N.C.
VCC
X2
GND
OUTPUT
1000p
N.C.
VCC
X3
GND
OUTPUT
5
SG8002DC(18.3856MHz)
CLK_CONT1
8
SG8002DC(48.0000MHz)
C76
0.1u
CLK_CONT1
C264
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4
MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
(3) DQM1
(3) SDCKE
4
5
4
5
RAMDB11
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB8
RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12
10kJx4
8 RAMDB3
7 RAMDB2
6 RAMDB1
5 RAMDB0
BR42
1
2
3
4
RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12
RAMDB3
RAMDB2
RAMDB1
RAMDB0
RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4
RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4
(3) /SDRAS
(3) /SDCAS
(3) /SDWDE
(3) DQM0
C77
82p
R53
C231
120p
R363
1
2
3
4
BR34
1
2
3
4
BR35
1
2
3
4
BR36
33J
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
PFCLKIN
(1,3) A[20..0]
(1,3) D[15..0]
33J SFCLK48
1
2
3
4
BR37
TP435
1
TP436
2
TP437
3
TP438
4
BR40
TP439
1
TP440
2
TP441
3
TP442
4
BR41
TP443
1
TP444
2
TP445
3
TP446
4
BR44
TP429
1
TP430
2
TP447
3
TP448
4
BR47
TP414
1
TP415
2
TP416
3
TP417
4
BR49
TP418
1
TP419
2
TP420
3
TP421
4
BR50
RAM_CLK_OUT
TP431
TP432
TP433
TP434
TP425
TP426
TP427
TP428
TP413
TP422
TP423
TP424
MAD10
(3) BANK1
(3) BANK0
(3) /SDCS
TP409
TP410
TP411
TP412
(6) MM_PH_A
(6) MM_AI0
(6) MM_AI1
(6) MM_PH_B
(6) MM_BI0
(6) MM_BI1
(5) MM_Y3
(5) MM_Y2
(5) MM_Y1
MAD3
MAD2
MAD1
MAD0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_AI0
(10) CL
33Jx4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
33Jx4
33Jx4
TP399
82Jx4
33Jx4
33Jx4
33Jx4
33Jx4
8
7
6 TP374
5 TP375
33Jx4
8
7
6
5
33Jx4
8
7
6
5
47p 47p 47p 47p 47p N.M. 47p 47p N.M. 47p N.M.
TP405
TP406
TP407
TP408
TP401
TP402
TP403
TP404
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
IC4
BR29
AFE_DB7 0Jx4
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4
BR31
AFE_DB3 0Jx4
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB0
TP396
TP397
TP398
TP400
TP392
TP393
TP394
TP395
TP388
TP389
TP390
TP391
TP384
TP385
TP386
TP387
TP380
TP381
TP382
TP383
TP376
TP377
TP378
TP379
TP372
TP373
TP368
TP369
TP370
TP371
TP360
TP361
TP362
TP363
TP364
TP365
TP366
TP367
TP357
TP358
TP359
TP356
TP347
TP346
TP345
TP344
TP343
TP342
C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
(3) RAMDB[15..0]
10kJ
10kJ
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
AFE_DB7
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4
10kJx4
AFE_DB3
8
AFE_DB2
7
AFE_DB1
6
AFE_DB0
5
10kJx4
10kJ AFE_SDI
8
7
6
5
BR33
1
2
3
4
R37
R38
VCC3
(3) MAD[12..0]
1
2
3
4
BR30
1
2
3
4
BR32
R36
VCC3
(4) AFE_DB[7..0]
0J (1608)
L13
VCC3
(4) ADCLK
(4) AFE_SEN
(4) AFE_SCK
AFE_SDI
BR39
1
2
3
4
(3) SDCLK
VCC3
(4) CCD_PHI2
(4) AFE_SDI
(4) CCD_PHI1
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
GND(CORE)
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
VCC(CORE)
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
GND(AC)
RAM_MAD3
RAM_MAD2
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD1
RAM_MAD0
RAM_MAD10
VCC(CORE)
RAM_BANKS1
RAM_BANKS0
RAM_CS
RAM_RAS
RAM_CAS
VCC(AC)
RAM_WDE
RAM_DQM0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA7
RAM_DATA6
RAM_DATA5
RAM_DATA4
GND(CORE)
RAM_DATA3
RAM_DATA2
RAM_DATA1
RAM_DATA0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA15
RAM_DATA14
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DATA13
RAM_DATA12
RAM_DATA11
RAM_DATA10
RAM_DATA9
RAM_DATA8
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DQM1
RAM_CKE
GND(AC)
RAM_CLK_OUT
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD12
RAM_MAD11
RAM_MAD9
VCC(CORE)
RAM_MAD8
RAM_MAD7
VCC(AC)
RAM_MAD6
RAM_MAD5
RAM_MAD4
GND(AC)
CPUDATA15
CPUDATA14
CPUDATA13
CPUDATA12
CPUDATA11
CPUDATA10
CPUDATA9
CPUDATA8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
R35
R33
R32
R31
R30
R29
33J
TP348
TP349
TP350
TP351
TP352
TP353
TP354
TP355
4
D7
D6
D5
D4
D
R27
D3
D2
D1
D0
TP341
TP268
(4) CCD_CP
33J
33J
33J
A9
A8
A7
A6
R26
TP271
R25
R24
TP335
TP334
TP333
TP332
TP331
TP330
TP329
TP328
TP327
RAM_CLK_OUT
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
TP340
R34
BR28
4
3
2
1
JTG_TCK
JTG_TMS
JTG_TDI
JTG_TDO
/OUTCS
R28
BR27
4
3
2
1
/INREQ
/PCLPRO
/FAXPRO
/ESPRD
/OUTACK
10KJ
10kJx4
5
6
7
8
10KJ
10kJx4
5
6
7
8
VCC3
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
HG73C141HFV
ASIC
TP272
TP273
PFCLK
CLKSW
TP339
TP274
TP275
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
(4) BSAMP
TP269
MEM_INT
(4)
MIRCNT
(1) CPU_SYNC
TP276
SYNC#
(4) CCD_RS
3
(4) VIDEO#
/LEND
(1,4) CCD_TG
33J
R23
TP336
ARB_INT
(1)
TP277
TP278
(5)
TP338
3
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
(5) PTPULSE
(4) VSAMP
TP337
MCU PWB (Graphic_ASIC section) (AR-203E/5420)
4
(5) MMD
(5) PMD
(5) TC
(5)
GRIDL
(5) MC
(5) BIAS
SFCLK48
/CS2
(1)
C75
22000p
C232
22000p
(1,3,4)
TP326
TP325
JTG_TDO
JTG_TDI
/RESET0
TP324
TP323
JTG_TMS
JTG_TCK
(1) /LWR
/RD
(1,3)
/ASIC_RST
(1,4,12)
TP279
TP280
TP281
TP282
TP283
TP284
TP3
TP285
VFMCNT_12V
(5)
0.1u
C230
TP99
TP100
TP101
TP287
TP4
VFM_24V
(5)
5
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TP77
TP78
TP79
TP80
TP81
TP82
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRO
/PCLPRO
TP83
TP84
TP85
MTAD15
MTAD14
MTAD13
TP86
TP87
TP88
MTAD12
MTAD11
MTAD10
TP89
TP90
TP91
MTAD9
MTAD8
MTAD7
TP92
TP93
TP94
MTAD6
MTAD5
MTAD4
TP95
TP96
TP97
TP98
MTAD3
MTAD2
MTAD1
MTAD0
MTAD12
MTAD13
MTAD14
MTAD15
MTAD8
MTAD9
MTAD10
MTAD11
MTAD4
MTAD5
MTAD6
MTAD7
MTAD0
MTAD1
MTAD2
MTAD3
1 1 1 1 1 1
TP106
TP107
TP108
TP109
TP110
TP111
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
TP102
TP103
TP104
TP105
TP286
TP288
TP289
TP290
TP291
10kJx4
5
6
7
8
10kJx4
5
6
7
8
BR68
4
3
2
1
BR69
4
3
2
1
C256
N.M.
R409
N.M._10KJ
VCC3
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
10kJx4
5
6
7
8
BR66
4
3
2
1
/POREQ
VCC(AC)
/PIWT
/PIACK
GND(AC)
/POACK
/PIREQ
GND(CORE)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
VCC(CORE)
/TRANSST
/RECEPTST
/PRINTST
/SCANST
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
GND(CORE)
VPOUT
VMOUT
OEN
GND(AC)
SUSPEND
IE1284_PARAD0
IE1284_PARAD1
VCC(AC)
IE1284_PARAD2
IE1284_PARAD3
IE1284_PARAD4
IE1284_PARAD5
IE1284_PARAD6
IE1284_PARAD7
IE1284_REV
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_FAULT
IE1284_ACK
IE1284_BUSY
IE1284_PE
GND(CORE)
IE1284_SLCT
IE1284_INIT
IE1284_SLCTIN
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_AUTOFD
IE1284_STB
TSP_MODE
TSO0
/SCANSP
VCC(AC)
OPE_CLK
GND(AC)
OPE_LATCH
OPE_DATA
TM
/TM
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14B
OUTP13B
OUTP12B
OUTP11B
OUTP10B
OUTP09B
OUTP08B
GND(CORE)
OUTP07B
OUTP06B
OUTP05B
10kJx4
5
6
7
8
BR67
4
3
2
1
TP44
TP43
TP42
TP41
TP46
TP45
TP50
TP49
TP48
TP47
TP67
TP54
TP53
TP52
TP51
TP70
TP69
TP68
TP75
TP74
TP73
TP72
TP71
TP56
TP57
TP58
TP59
TP60
TP61
TP62
TP63
TP64
TP65
TP66
(1,4) /RESET1
33J
33J
33Jx4
BR60
33Jx4
BR61
R404
R403
33Jx4
BR62
33Jx4
BR63
1 1
2
TP451
HL (5)
PR (5)
CPFS2 (5)
SPFON (4)
MIRON (4)
MPFS (5)
OP_LATCH (4)
OP_DATA (4)
TM (4)
TM_ (4)
OP_CLK (4)
/SCANSP (1)
1
2
3
4
TP5
TP34
TP35
TP36
(4) (/ASIC_RST)
TP55
TP40
TP39
TP38
TP37
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TP322
TP117
TP118
TP119
TP120
TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
TP76
TP115
TP116
/POACK
/PIREQ
TP113
TP114
BR71
1
2
3
4
BR70
1
2
3
4
TP112
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
PIDATA3
G3.3V
VCC3
2
1
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
TP292
TP293
1
1 1 1 1 1
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
(5) RRS
(5) LDEN
1
1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
N.M.
N.M.
R408
TP298
C257
47p
33J
R407
TP303
TP302
TP301
TP300
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB
R406
TP307
TP306
TP305
TP304
R49
10kJ
TP452 /OA_RST (13)
R50
N.M.
R45
N.M.
VCC3
TP299
/INIT (13)
/SLCTIN (13)
/AUTOFD (13)
/STB (13)
/ACK (13)
BUSY (13)
PE (13)
SLCT (13)
/REV (13)
/FAULT (13)
R44
10kJ
VCC3
TP309
TP308
/ACK
BUSY
PE
SLCT
TP313
TP312
TP311
TP310
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
/REV
FAULT
TP317
TP316
TP315
TP314
10kJ
R39
G3.3V
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
VCC3
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
VCC3
1
(1,5) POFF
C79
47p
10J
R52
SYNC#
PFCLK
R236
R51
10kJ
R48
N.M.
VCC3
(13)
33J
R43
PARAD[7..0]
33J
33J
33J
R40
R41
R42
N.M.
TP450
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
47u/16V
C37
(4)
PFCLKOUT
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
BR54
1
2
3
4
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB
(/SYNC)
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
BR52
1
2
3
4
BR53
1
2
3
4
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
10kJx4
8
7
6
5
BR51
1
2
3
4
BR46
1
2
3
4
BR43
1
2
3
4
R253
R254
R255
R256
SUSPEND (11)
VPOUT (11)
VMOUT (11)
OEN (11)
/PRINTST (1)
/SCANST (1)
RCV (11)
VPIN (11)
VMIN (11)
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
ZJSR5101-223
R375
N.M.
R374
N.M.
VCC3
VCC3
VCC3
VCC3
2/12
/TRANSST (1)
L2
N.M.
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
CLK_CONT
1
+
L12
MEM_INT
CLKSW
/POACK
/PIREQ
TP318
TP321
TP320
TP319
N.M.
C70
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0.1u
0.1u
C59
N.M.
C71
1 1
1
1
1 1
1
1 1 1
1
1
0.1u
0.1u
C60
N.M.
C72
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0.1u
C27
0.1u
0.1u
C28
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
C61
C38
C29
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
C62
C39
C30
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
C63
C40
C31
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
C41
C32
0.1u
0.1u
C64
C42
C33
0.1u
0.1u
C43
C34
0.1u
C65
C44
C35
0.1u
0.1u
C36
0.1u
0.1u
C66
C45
0.1u
C67
C46
0.1u
C68
C47
0.1u
C69
N.M.
C73
CLPWM
VCC(AC)
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
GND(AC)
AFESCK
VCC(CORE)
ADCLK
GND(CORE)
AFE_SEN
CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2
AFE_SDI
CCD_CP
BSAMP
CCD_RS
CCD_TG
VSAMP
GND(CORE)
TD0
TDI
TRSK
TMS
TCK
VCC(CORE)
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRD
/PCLPRD
GND(AC)
MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13
VCC(CORE)
MDAT12
MDAT11
MDAT10
VCC(AC)
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
GND(CORE)
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04
VCC(CORE)
MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00
GND(AC)
/INCS
/INACK
/OUTREQ
GND(CORE)
/HSYNC
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
VCC(AC)
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
/POCS
CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4
VCC(AC)
CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0
GND(AC)
MIRCNT
/CPUSYNC
MEM_INT
ARB_INT
VCC(CORE)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5
GND(CORE)
RAM_CLK_IN
CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0
/CPUCS
SFCLK48
GND(CORE)
/CPUWR
/CPURD
/RESET
VCC(CORE)
PFCLK
CLKSW
GND(CORE)
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
TM2_15M
/SYNC
GND(AC)
/VIDEO
/LEND
VCC(AC)
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP07A
OUTP08A
GND(CORE)
OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14A
OUTP00B
GND(AC)
OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
VCC(AC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
TP294
TP295
TP296
TP297
(5) MRPS1
(5) MRPS2
(5) MRPS3
(5) CPFS1
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 10
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 11
A
B
C
(1,2) D[15..0]
(1,2) A[20..0]
5
(1) /CS1
(1,2) /RD
(1) /HWR
/RD
/HWR
(1) SCL
(1) SDA
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
N.M.
C235
D
5
28
12
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32
1kJ
GND
GND
VDD
VDD
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
C81
0.1u
9
25
8
24
6
7
10
11
22
23
26
27
8
7
6
5
VCC
WC
SCL
SDA
IC5
E0
E1
E2
VSS
1
2
3
4
0.1u
C83
0.1u
C84
VCC3 VCC3
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
24C02/24WC04/24WC08
VCC3
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR
CS1
OE
WE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
IC8
SRAM
R58
VCC3
Serial EE-PROM
R59
N.M.
R56
10kJ
VCC3
4
A17
A1
A19
A18
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
R69
(1,2,4) /RESET0
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A20
MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-203E/5420)
N.M.
C236
10kJ
OPEN
22000p
0.1u
OPEN
C86
C87
3
OPEN
0J
OPEN
R83
OPEN
R86
OPEN
OPEN
(J1,J2 in the case of N.M.:0J)
R82
A16
BYTE
GND
DQ15
DQ7
DQ14
DQ6
DQ13
DQ5
DQ12
DQ4
VCC
DQ11
DQ3
DQ10
DQ2
DQ9
DQ1
DQ8
DQ0
OE
GND
CE
A0
S29AL008D70TFI020#
S29GL016A90TFIR20#
Flash ROM
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A19
NC
WE
RP
VPP
WP
RY/BY
A18
A17
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
48
47
46 TP457
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
R66
10kJ
0.1u
C87
A17
J1,J2
A1
1
2
3
VCC3
10kJ
TP454 VPP
/HWR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TP453 11
12
13
14
TP455 15
16
TP456 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
IC7
FLASH ROM
LH28F800BJE-PBTL90(LHF80JZP)
LH28F160BJE-BTL90(LHF16JT2)
0J
VCC3
VPP
VCC3
FlashROM VPP Controll
3
R81
IC7
0J
(1) RY/BY
R68
N.M.
R64
N.M.
R65
10kJ
R63
N.M.
R70
0.1u
C85
N.M.
C86
N.M.
R62
4
N.M.
C233
5
N.M.
C234
/RD
/CS0 (1)
D11
D3
D10
D2
D9
D1
D8
D0
D15
D7
D14
D6
D13
D5
D12
D4
MAD10
MAD0
MAD1
MAD2
MAD3
(2) DQM0
(2) /SDWDE
(2) /SDCAS
(2) /SDRAS
(2) /SDCS
(2) BANK0
(2) BANK1
RAMDB7
RAMDB5
RAMDB6
RAMDB3
RAMDB4
RAMDB1
RAMDB2
RAMDB0
2
64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank)
C92
0.1u
Vendor/Type
C91
0.1u
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39 TP458
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
K4S641632K-UC75
K4S281632I-UC60
C90
0.1u
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
VSS
DQ15
VSSQ
DQ14
DQ13
VCCQ
DQ12
DQ11
VSSQ
DQ10
DQ9
VCCQ
DQ8
VSS
NC
UDQM
CLK
CLKE
NC
A11
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
VSS
SDRAM
VCC
DQ0
VCCQ
DQ1
DQ2
VSSQ
DQ3
DQ4
VCCQ
DQ5
DQ6
VSSQ
DQ7
VCC
LDQM
WE
CAS
RAS
CS
BA0
BA1
A10
A0
A1
A2
A3
VCC
C89
0.1u
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
IC6
128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank)
IC6
C88
0.1u
VCC3
VCC3
2
C93
0.1u
VCC3
C94
0.1u
C82
N.M.
DQM1 (2)
SDCLK (2)
SDCKE (2)
RAMDB8
R67
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB12
RAMDB11
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB15
0J
MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4
1
1
MAD[12..0] (2)
RAMDB[15..0]
(2)
3/12
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 12
A
B
C
D
5
(7) (PD1)
(7) (PD2)
(7) (SPID)
(7) (FANLK)
(7) (PPD2)
(7) (PPD3)
(5) THOPEN
(7) (CED2)
(7) DSWS
(7) (MMLD)
(8) (SELIN1)
(8) (SELIN2)
(8) (SELIN3)
(7) (PPD1)
(7) (POD)
(7) (MFD)
(7) (CED1)
(7) (TCS)
(7) (PMRDY)
(7) DVS1
(7) (DRST)
TP482
TP483
TP480
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
TP471
TP472
TP473
TP474
TP475
TP476
TP477
TP478
11
10
9
7
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
11
10
9
7
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
TP484
TP485
TP486
TP463
TP464
TP465
TP466
TP467
TP468
TP469
TP470
IC10
GND
GND
IC13
GND
W
Y
VCC
74HC151
A
B
C
G
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
W
Y
VCC
74HC151
A
B
C
G
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
IC12
W
Y
VCC
74HC151
A
B
C
G
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
5V
5V
8
5
TP491
6
TP492
16
8
5
TP489
6
TP490
16
8
5
TP487
6
TP488
16
5V
Digital Input Multiprexer
C104
33p
C103
0.1u
10J
33p
0.1u
TP495
C100
R86
10J
C99
TP494
33p
R80
C97
0.1u
TP493
C96
10J
R74
4
5V
SIN2
SIN1
R85
10kJ
SIN3
(8) FW
(10) mt_at_home
(9) /SYNC
(1) SELIN1
(1) SELIN2
(1) SELIN3
(2) OP_CLK
(2) OP_DATA
(2) OP_LATCH
(2) TM
(2) TM_
(1) SPFMT0
(1) SPFMT1
(1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(1) SPFMT3
(2) MIRON
(2) SPFON
(2) MIRCNT
(1,2,12) /ASIC_RST
(1) D_CONT
(8) KEYIN1
(8) KEYIN2
(1,2,3) /RESET0
(11) USB_IN
SIN1
SIN2
SIN3
(2) AFE_SDI
(2) AFE_SEN
(2) AFE_SCK
R99
10kJ
VCC3
3.3V
3.3V
100J
TP500
TP501
5V/3.3V
R15
0J
R78
5V/3.3V
/RESET#
TP503
AFE_SDI
TP496
5V/3.3V
R81
10kJ
MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-203E/5420)
3.3V
0.1u(N.M.)
C258
3
3
1
3
47p
1
C109
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
TP506
R98
N.M.
5V
TP502
TP18
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
3
TP505
R97
10kJ
4
R128
10kJ
5
R96
10kJ
IC9
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
GND
Y2
Y1
Vcc
GND
Y2
Y1
Vcc
NC7WZ17
A2
A1
IC35
NC7WZ17
A2
A1
IC18
74VHCT244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC15
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC14
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC11
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
2
4
6
5
2
4
6
5
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
C98
0.1u
0.1u
C107
C105
0.1u
0.1u
R75
R76
R77
R79
0.01uF
R87
R88
R89
R90
R91
R92
R93
R94
TP531 R100
TP533 R101
33J
4
3
2
1
33J
N.M.
(FW) (1)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(2)
(1)
2
(SELIN1) (8)
(SELIN2) (8)
(SELIN3) (8)
(OP_CLK) (8)
(OP_DATA) (8)
(OP_LATCH) (8)
(TM) (6)
(TM_) (6)
(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT3)
(10) AFE_DB#[7..0]
(/ASIC_RST) (2)
/RESET1 (1,2)
(D_CONT) (11)
(KEYIN1) (1)
(KEYIN2) (1)
mt_at_home#
(/SYNC)
TP528
TP529
TP530
N.M.
C255
(USB_IN) (1)
(SIN1) (1)
(SIN2) (1)
(SIN3) (1)
AFE_SDI# (10)
AFE_SEN# (10)
AFE_SCK# (10)
AFE_SDI#
/RESET#
AFE_SDI#
R133
open
C102
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33Jx4
BR55
3.3V
5
6
7
8
33J
33J
1kJ
33J
AFE_SDI
33J
33J
33J
C101
3.3V
3.3V
TP520
TP521
TP522
TP523
TP524
TP525
TP526
TP527
5V
TP516
TP517
TP518
TP519
3.3V
C221
VCC3
0.1u
C110
VCC3
5V
TP513
TP514
TP515
3.3V
TP497
R71
TP498
R72
TP499
R73
TP19 R130
0J
TP507
TP508
TP509
TP510
TP511
VCC3
TP12
TP11
TP270
C95
0.1u
VCC3
TP17
VCC3
2
(1) STROBE
(2) VIDEO#
(2) VSAMP
(1,2) CCD_TG
(2) CCD_RS
(2) BSAMP
(2) CCD_CP
(2) CCD_PHI2
(2) CCD_PHI1
(2) ADCLK
3.3V
3.3V
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
0.1u
C263
0.1u
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1
0Jx4
BR65
0Jx4
BR64
5V
5V
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
4
TP542
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
VCC3
4
TP543
NC7ST08M5X
IC45
R422
R95
1
5V
5V
C262
0.1u
C108
82p
C124
82p
C125
82p
C126
N.M.
C129
N.M.
C130
82p
C132
33p
C133
82p
R54
56J
R57
56J
R61
100J
R83
47J
VCC3
TP534
TP535
TP536
TP537
TP538
TP539
TP540
TP541
VCC3
NC7ST08M5X
IC16
74LCX244(open)
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC44
C106
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
IC43
VCC3
1
100J
100J
R46
56J
R55
100J
R60
56J
R82
100J
C80
0.1u
TP544
CCD_TG#
CCD_RS#
CCD_CP#
AFE_DB[7..0]
(STROBE) (8)
(2)
VSAMP# (10)
CCD_TG# (10)
CCD_RS# (10)
BSAMP# (10)
CCD_CP# (10)
CCD_PHI2# (10)
CCD_PHI1# (10)
ADCLK# (10)
/VIDEO (9)
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_PHI1#
ADCLK#
BSAMP#
VSAMP#
VSAMP#
CCD_TG#
CCD_RS#
BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_PHI1#
ADCLK#
4/12
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
(1) MMCLK
(2) VFM_24V
(2) VFMCNT_12V
5
6
7
8
R142
10kJ(open)
R414
N.M._10kJ
VCC3
Q14
5
KRC102S
2
R418
N.M._10kJ
VCC3
1.5kJx4
8
7
6
5
R370 1.5kJ
BR56
1
2
3
4
R138
10kJ
4
3
2
1
R419
N.M._10kJ
(1) MCNT
(2) MC
(2) BIAS
(2) TC
(2) GRIDL
BR72
10kJx4
3
TP549
TP545
TP546
TP547
TP548
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM
Q16
R379
R380
Q17
/MMCLK (9)
KRC102S
2
TP604
3
(2) MM_Y1
(2) MM_Y2
(2) MM_Y3
(2) PMD
(1) PMCLK
(2) LDEN
(2) /LEND
R116
10kJ
R84
10kJ
TP603
(2) PR
R196
10kJ
PGND
TP554
TP555
TP556
TP557
TP558
TP559
TP560
/MC (8)
/BIAS (8)
/TC (8)
/GRIDL (8)
/MCNT (9)
3
N.M._1.5kJ
N.M._1.5kJ
1.5kJx4
8
7
6
5
(2) MMD
(2) MRPS1
(2) MRPS2
(2) MRPS3
(1,2) POFF
(2) HL
FTH
24V
BR57
1
2
3
4
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
KRC102S
2
KID65001AF
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E
(2) CPFS1
(2) CPFS2
(2) MPFS
(2) RRS
PGND
TP551
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IC19
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TP22
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM
100J
4
(S)
(D)
TP614
4.7kJ 1/4W
R387
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
(G)
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC
KID65503F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G
IC25
KID65503F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G
IC24
PGND
R386
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Q21
RLS-73
D58
B
2
5V
TP613
TP615
MMref0 (6)
MMref1 (6)
MMref2 (6)
/PMD (9)
PMCLK_A (9)
/LDEN (9)
Q11
2SK3018(open)
0J
TP610
12V
2
3
3
1SS355
D5
TP611
INT5V
R117
10kJ Q4
KRC102S
Q3
KRA119S
CRH01
D56
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
CP17
CRH01
D55
Q13
2SB1132
TP609
TP607
Q12
2SB1132
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
24V
3
R109
PGND
3
SHOLD (9)
HLOUT (8)
R115
100J 1/4W
TP612
TP562
N.M._47kJ
R108
24V
Q2
N.M._KTA1505S
(2) PTPULSE
/PR (8)
D35
1SS355
/PR
3
N.M._4.7kJ 1/4W
D34
1SS355
TP265
INT24V
/VFMCNT (9)
Q20
KRA119S
R413
N.M._10kJ
2
CP16
5V
3
TP266
TP606
TP561
47kJ
/MMD (9)
MRPS_1 (6)
MRPS_2 (6)
MRPS_3 (6)
/POFF (8)
TP608
R389
B
47kJ
D57
RLS-73
TP605
R388
R405
1
/CPFS1 (9)
/CPFS2 (9)
/MPFS (9)
/RRS (9)
KRC102S
2
D49
MTZ J22B
TP21
24V
PR#
4.7kJ 1/4W
R194
KID65001AF
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E
IC21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100J
R195
E
C
1
MCU PWB (Driver section 2) (AR-203E/5420)
E
PGND
R144
47kJ
1SS355
TP29
1uF/16V
C134
VFMOUT (9)
TP264
D4
R146
1.5kF
1
3
3
2
1
5V
0J
R364
VCC3
MA700
D1
R103
1MF
TP27
VCC3
R153
100J
3
2
1
5V
R365
0J
KDS226(open)
D46
R114
10kF
TP622
R112
1.2kF
R107
4.3kF
R104
7.5kF
R192
10kJ
R191
4.7kJ
12V
+
-
3
2
12V
+
-
3
2
12V
+
-
5
6
2
3
12V
-
+
TP624
12V
+
-
5
6
7
IC20B
KIA393F
IC22B
KIA358F
7
12V
R366
N.M.
22000p
C115
R113
10kJ
10kJ
R367
0.1u/50V
C114
R110
300J
0.1u/50V
TP621
C162
0.1u
C111
12V
VCC3
TP23
R105
1kJ
TP623
5V
1
TP620
IC22A
KIA358F
1
IC20A
KIA393F
12V
1
IC17A
KIA393F
VCC3
Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer
TP618
VCC3
C160
2.2uF/10V
TP26
R155
470kJ
VCC3
C112
22000p
KDS226(open)
D2
R106
10kF
TP617
R102
1kF
TP28
R129
N.M.
2
(12) TCS_AN
(9) RTH_IN
D33
1SS355
2
Q18
KRC102S
2
8
4
4
1
C
1
1
8
4
8
4
8
4
3
3
2
1
Q19
2SK3018
2
1
VCC3
0.1u
C113
VCC3
(S)
(D)
1
N.M.
C237
KDS226(open)
D47
R111
100J
KDS226
D3
TP619
(G)
R193
10kJ
1
+
-
5
6
7
(TCS_AN) (1)
THOPEN (4)
TP479
KIA393F
IC17B
5/12
RTH (1)
FTH
12V
PR#
8
4
5
8
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 13
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
4
5
(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT3)
(5) MRPS_1
(5) MRPS_2
(5) MRPS_3
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(5) MMref0
(5) MMref1
(5) MMref2
(9) OUT_A(9) OUT_A+
(9) OUT_B+
(9) OUT_B-
R125
2kJ
TP595
TP596
TP597
R134
300J
TP588
TP589
TP590
R126
1kJ
R135
620J
R136
1.2kJ
10kJx4
BR59
R127
510J
0.1u
PGND
C131
R131
1.2kJ
PGND
5V
PGND
C118
820p
TP587
(2) MM_BI0
(2) MM_BI1
(2) MM_PH_B
TP586
R121
1.5kJ
PGND
C120
0.1u
R137
100J
5V
C117
820p
R122
1kJ
PGND
0.68J 1W
R119
PGND
R123
30kJ
TP591
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VS
SENSE 1
COMP 1
OUT 1B
I01
GND
GND
I11
PHASE 1
VREF 1
RC 1
VSS
5V
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
PGND
4
R141
1J 2W
PGND
R132
1J 2W
14
5
6
9
8
7
11
12
GND
OUT A
OUT A
OUT A/
OUT A/
OUT B
OUT B
OUT B/
OUT B/
STA7100M
Sense B
Sense A
Sync
REF
IN A
IN A/
IN B
IN B/
IC28
Vs
R124
30kJ
5V
SPF Motor Driver
PGND
C121
0.1u
L6219DS
OUT 1A
OUT 2A
SENSE 2
COMP 2
OUT 2B
GND
GND
I02
I12
PHASE 2
VREF 2
RC 2
IC27
TP594
24VSCMT
Scanner Motor Driver
MCU PWB (Driver section 3) (AR-203E/5420)
5
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 14
10
1
2
3
4
17
18
15
16
13
PGND
24VSPFMT
C119
820p
TP592
MM_AI1 (2)
MM_PH_A (2)
MM_AI0 (2)
TP593
R120
1.5kJ
PGND
SPMT_3 (9)
SPMT_1 (9)
SPMT_2 (9)
SPMT_0 (9)
C116
820p
0.68J 1W
R118
C122
47u/35V
3
PGND
+
24V
3
C123
0.1u/50V
(4) (TM_)
(4) (TM)
24VDupMT
CP3
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
24VSPFMT
CP2
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
24VSCMT
CP1
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
2
(1) DMT3
(1) DMT2
(1) DMT1
(1) DMT0
2
0.1u
C222
O4
O3
O2
O1
COM
COM
TD62064AF
GND
GND
I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC
IC26
1
8
16
9
7
2
5V
5
1
9
2
Vref
Vs
N.C
OUT2
OUT1
TA7291AS
GND
IN2
IN1
Vcc
IC29
4
3
7
8
6
Tonner Motor Driver
PGND
17
18
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Duplex Motor Driver
R244
4.7kJ
+
24VDupMT
C127
10u/35V
MTZ J22B
D6
/DMT3 (9)
/DMT2 (9)
/DMT1 (9)
/DMT0 (9)
1
24V
For AL2040 Model Only
1
TMB_O (9)
TMA_O (9)
0.1u/50V
C128
6/12
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 15
A
B
C
D
C145
N.M.
C152
0.1u
C144
N.M.
C151
0.1u
(8) 12VIN
N.M.
0.1u
1
0J (1608)
47u/35V
5
22u/16V
C181
47u/25V
C177
L4
ZJSR5101-223(open)
L14
1000p
1000p
C169
C224
C223
TP14
0.1u
+
1
1000p
C225
TP15
R242
10J
0.1u
C156
0.1u
C149
N.M.
C140
+
+
PGND
C155
N.M.
C148
N.M.
C139
TP13
1
0.1u
C154
N.M.
C147
0.1u
C138
R241
10J
0.1u
C153
N.M.
C146
0.1u
C137
R240
10J
VCC3
C136
C135
0.1u
C183
0.1u
C179
R398
100kJ
5V
100kJ
R396
1000p
C226
TP16
24V
N.M.
C159
N.M.
C143
12V
R394
100kJ
0.1u
C158
N.M.
C142
R243
10J
0.1u/50V
C170
1
0.1u
C157
0.1u
C150
N.M.
C141
VCC3
4
22u/16V
C182
47u/35V
C175
R172
100J 2W
(8) 3.3VIN
INT24V
+
1SS355
IN
0.1u
C184
22u/16V
C178
0.22J 2W
R143
3
R397
100kJ
EN5V
+
0.1u
2
1
0.1u
C180
0.1u
C176
KDS226
C168
3
D13
D11
1SS355
2 KIA7805
GND
OUT
D20
1SS355
R163
2.7kJ
R162
20kJ
TP585
IC30
N.M.
1
PGND
D12
L5
ZJSR5101-223
L15
+
R161
20kJ
(9) 24V1(DSWS)
MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-203E/5420)
4
5V
R399
100kJ
VCC3
INT5V
PGND
R152
1kJ 2W
INT24V
DSWS (4)
3
3
(9) SPID
PPD1
PPD2
SPPD
PSW
(9) CED1
(9) CED2
(8) DRST
(9)
(9)
(9)
(8)
(12) DVSEL
(12) TCS
(9) MFD
(9) MMLD
(9) FANLK
(9) POD
(9) PMRDY
(9) PPD3
(9) PD1
(9) PD2
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
KDS226
D27
KDS226
D23
KDS226
D21
KDS226
D18
KDS226
D14
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
KDS226
D28
KDS226
D24
KDS226
D22
KDS226
D19
KDS226
D15
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
KDS226
D50
KDS226
D16
KDS226
KDS226
D25
2
1
2
1
2
1
D9
3
3
3
2
1
2
1
1000p
2
C186
1000p
1000p
C187
R175
7.5kJ
1000p
R174
15kJ
C172
R165
10kJ
1000p
3
3
C171
R164
10kJ
KDS226
D17
KDS226
D10
C185
R173
15kJ
2
1000p
C188
R176
7.5kJ
1000p
C173
R166
15kJ
R167
10kJ
1000p
C161
R145
15kJ
R177
7.5kJ
D51
5
ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open)
2
1
VCC3
2
KDS226
D29
KDS226
D26
D52
1
3
3
1000p
1000p
C248
R377
10kJ
C164
1000p
R148
10kJ
C163
R147
4.7kJ
ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open)
1000p
C189
R178
12kJ
1000p
C166
R150
15kJ
1000p
C190
R184
R185
R186
R180
R181
R182
R183
R179
3.3kJ
VCC3
R168
R169
R170
R171
R378
1000p
C165
R149
10kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1000p
C167
R151
10kJ
1
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
R159
R160
(4)
(4)
(1)
(1)
(POD) (4)
(PMRDY) (4)
(PPD3) (4)
(PD1) (4)
(PD2) (4)
(SPID) (4)
7/12
(CED1) (4)
(CED2) (4)
(DRST) (4)
(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(SPPD)
(PSW)
DVS1 (4)
(TCS) (4)
(MFD) (4)
(MMLD) (4)
(FANLK) (4)
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
R156
R157
R158
R154
1
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 16
A
B
C
D
EN5V
5V
(7) 12VIN
(4) FW
(5) /PR
(5) /BIAS
(5) /GRIDL
5
INT5V
PGND
INT24V
PGND
R400 N.M._1608size
PGND
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
B24B-PNDZS-1
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
CN1
To Power unit
4
HLOUT (5)
/POFF (5)
24V
3.3VIN (7)
/TC (5)
/MC (5)
(1) ONL
2
Q6
KRC106S
3
3
(4) KEYIN2
(4) KEYIN1
(1) PSL
Q5
KRC106S
R189
R190
2
1
1kJ
1kJ
3
5V
2
1
KDS226
D30
3
2
1
3
EN5V
KDS226
D31
(4) (OP_DATA)
(4) (OP_LATCH)
(4) (SELIN2)
(4) (OP_CLK)
(4) (SELIN1)
(4) (STROBE)
(4) (SELIN3)
(7) PSW
(7) DRST
2
1000p
C195
5V
2
1000p
1000p
KEYIN2#
KEYIN1#
C192
R188
10kJ
C191
R187
10kJ
KEYIN1#
KEYIN2#
To Operational PWB
CP7
MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-203E/5420)
3
CP8
4
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
5
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
1
N.M._1608size
0.1u/50V
C194
C193
IMSA-9619S-18A
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
1
1
8/12
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 17
A
B
C
PGND
24V
5
(White)
B2P-VH
1
2
CN23
24V
PGND
PGND
R206
PGND
1kJ
(Red)
B2P-VH-R
1
2
CN15
(White)
B4B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
CN11
B5B-PASK-1
1
2
3
4
5
CN6
3
KDS226
D42
2
1
5V
INT5V
B08B-CZHK-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN42
To Interlock switch
To Fan motor
To Main motor
To Polygon motor
(5) /LDEN
(4) /VIDEO
(5) SHOLD
B05B-CZHK-B
1
2
3
4
5
1000p
1000p
(4) /SYNC
C201
C200
CN41
1000p
1000p
To Toner motor
(6) TMA_O
(6) TMB_O
(5) /PMD
(7) PMRDY
(5) PMCLK_A
To LD
(7) 24V1(DSWS)
(5) VFMOUT
(7) FANLK
(5) /VFMCNT
C199
C198
0.1u/50V
C205
(5) /MMD
(7) MMLD
(5) /MMCLK
0.1u/50V
C206
D
4
24V
/DMT0
/DMT1
/DMT2
/DMT3
(7) PD1
(White)
N.M._B4B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
CN17
(Green)
B3B-PH-K-M
1
2
3
CN25
To Duplex motor
(For debug)
B05B-XASK-1
1
2
3
4
5
To Paper detect
(Red)
B4B-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
CN4
3
(7) MFD
R208
200J 1/4W
(5) RTH_IN
(7) PPD2
(7) POD
(7) PPD1
(5) /RRS
(5) /MPFS
To Cassette paper solenoid
To Cassette detect
To Mirror motor
(6) OUT_A+
(6) OUT_B+
(6) OUT_A(6) OUT_B-
(1) RxD
(1) TxD
VCC3
CPU Serial
Not mounted
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
CN13
(White)
B3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
CN10
(Black)
B3B-PH-K-K
1
2
3
CN7
24VDupMT
For AL2040 Model Only
(5) /CPFS1
(7) CED1
5V
24V
5V
5V
5V
24V
(Red)
B5B-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
5
CN26
(White)
B5B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
CN22
R205
200J 1/4W
(White)
B3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
CN19
R204
200J 1/4W
(Red)
B3B-PH-K-R
1
2
3
CN16
R203
200J 1/4W
(Blue)
B3B-PH-K-E
1
2
3
CN12
To Multi unit
To HL unit
To Paper out detect
2
To Resist roller solenoid
(Red)
N.M._B03B-PH-K-R
3
2
1
CN28
To Paper pass detect
(5) /MCNT
24V
To Mecha. COUNTER
(7) PD2
(7) CED2
(7) PPD3
(5) /CPFS2
SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
(7) SPID
(7) SPPD
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
PGND
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
5V
24VSPFMT
24V 5V
5V
To SPF unit
B14B-PHDSS-B
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
CN18
To 2nd. cassette
1000p
C202
INT24V
1000p
C203
MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-203E/5420)
1000p
C204
2
R207
3
200J 1/4W
1
9/12
For AL2040 Model Only
5V 24V
1
N.M.
PGND
B12B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN24
C246
4
R140
N.M._1608size
5
200J 1/4W
C247
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 18
4
0.1u/50V
C209
R210
15kJ
VCL
3
(4) mt_at_home
R213
1kJ
1000p
C211
R211
12kJ
VCC3
2
1
KDS226
D43
3
(4) AFE_DB#[7..0]
(4) AFE_SCK#
(4) ADCLK#
(4) CCD_PHI1#
(4) CCD_PHI2#
(4) CCD_CP#
(4) CCD_RS#
(4) CCD_TG#
CP9
2
VCL
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#6
PGND
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7
FF4-32-S15D5
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
CN3
PGND
EN5V
VCL
1
VSAMP# (4)
AFE_SDI# (4)
BSAMP# (4)
AFE_SEN# (4)
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#7
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#3
CP10
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
C
D
A
PGND
Q8
KTC3198
47u/35V
+ C208
CP6
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
12V
To Scanner unit
10/12
1
A
R215
56kJ
D44
11EQS06
TWKA-221K
L6
220uH
2
B
5
R214
15kJ
33p
+
R209
910J
Q9 2SJ537
3
B
C
(2) CL
C210
C207
47u/35V
24V
Copy Lamp Inverter
R212
D
4
MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-203E/5420)
5
5.6kJ 1/4W
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 19
A
B
C
D
4
5
(2) SUSPEND
(2) RCV
(2) VPIN
(2) VMIN
(2) VPOUT
(2) VMOUT
(2) OEN
(4) (D_CONT)
(4) USB_IN
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
C216 C217
C215
R221
R223
R224
33J
33J
33J
4
TP563
TP564
TP565
VCC3
6
3
4
5
2
9
12
13
VCC
GND
NC
D+
D-
MODE
USB1T20
SUSPEND
RCV
VP
VM
OE#
SPEED
VPO
VMO/FSEO
IC31
7
8
TP566
0.1u
C214
R219
1 TP567
11
10
R420
14
VCC3
MCU PWB (USB2.0 (FULL) I/F section) (AR-203E only)
5
TP568
TP569
N.M.
N.M.
R220
R222
24J
24J
3
1.5kJ
R218
R216
3
24J
10kJ
R217
TP570
TP571
100p
C212
BLM18BB121SN1D
BLM18BB121SN1D
ZENER_6.2V
D45
L8
L7
2
0.1u
C213
2
L16
0J (1608)
L9
0J (1608)
F.G
CN33
1
UBS21-4K2J00(ACON)
Shield
+5V
DD+
GND
D32
HZM6.2Z4MWA(open)
1
2
3
4
11/12
1
A
B
C
D
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 20
A
B
C
D
4
(1) CRUMSCL
(1,2,4) /ASIC_RST
(1) CRUMSDTA
5
R231
0J
3.3V
3.3V
TP572
R139
1kJ
4
1
0.1u
C220
R232
10kJ(open)
R225
N.M.
VCC3
GND
B
Vcc
3
2
5
N.M.
2
3
5
1
EN5V
4
5V
C218
0.1u
EN5V
NC7ST08M5X(open)
IC34
TC7SBD385AFU(open)
OE
A
IC32
R376
4
TP574
TP573
R226
10kJ
(CRUMSCL)
(CRUMSDTA)
5V
MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-203E/5420)
5
(5) TCS_AN
(7) TCS
(7) DVSEL
TP575
TP576
R368
R369
3
N.M.
0J
3
24V
24V
2
4
6
8
10
R200
10J
PGND
(White)
2
1
KDS226
D39
0J (1608)
FB4
0J (1608)
FB3
0J (1608)
FB2
0J (1608)
FB1
EN5V
N.M._B10B-PHDSS-B
1
3
5
7
9
CN9
(Red)
B4B-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
CN5
3
2
1
3
F-GND 4
F-GND 3
F-GND 2
N.M._300J
N.M._300J
R201
R202
2
(CRUMSDTA)
(CRUMSCL)
To DV Unit with CRUM
(Analog Tonner Sensor)
F-GND 1
KDS226
D40
To DV Unit
(Analog Tonner Sensor)
2
1
1
12/12
A
B
C
D
1
2
(6)
CPU3.3
LCDCONT
33J
(8)
(9)
TP109
(3)
(2)
(4)
(4)
A
C11
NM
TP724
33P
R25
5
6
7
8
C9
33P
C19
10U/10V<2012>
L1
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB1
0J <1608>
SPFMT3
SPFMT2
SPFMT1
SPFMT0
/RES_USB20
/SCANSP
/SCANST
/TRANSST
/ES_PAGE
PROTECT
/RES_OA982
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_GASIC
(PSFANLK)
/ES_PAGE
/CSIOASIC
/CSGASIC
/CSSRAM
/CSFROM
(2)
/SCANSP
(2)
/SCANST
(2)
/TRANSST
(6)
PMCLK
(5)
SPFMT3
(5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(5)
SPFMT1
(5)
SPFMT0
(10) /RES_USB20
R51
RTH
(TCS_AN)
0.1U
C20
(2,5) VIDEO#
(6)
(6)
/RES_OA982
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_GASIC
0.1U
C21
3
(9)
(3)
(2)
0.1U
C22
NM
0J
NM
0.1U
C2
VCC3
33JX4
BR20
33J
(9)
(9)
(9)
(4)
TP2
4
3
2
1
/CS3#
/CS2#
/CS1#
/CS0#
ES_STS
ES_CMD
/ES_SRDY
RY/BY
TP729
TP734
TP735
R7
R6
TP4
R2
NM
TP3
R1
7
6
4
3
VCC3
TP79
TP80
TP74
TP76
TP78
TP62
TP64
TP66
TP68
TP70
TP56
TP40
TP42
TP44
TP46
TP48
TP49
TP51
TP53
ES_STS
ES_CMD
/ES_SRDY
RY/BY
R16
R17
R18
R13
R14
R15
XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS
B
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
IC2
33J
33J
33J
TP6
TP5
TP1
1
8
5
2
R20
/PRINTST
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#
R3
0J
15PF
C1
15PF
330J
C5
AVcc
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
AVss
Vss
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0
MD0
MD1
MD2
PG0/CAS
PG1/CS3
PG2/CS2
33J
33J
100J
CY25811SC
VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1
IC1
TP8
TP9
(2)
/PRINTST
(2,3,4,5)
/RD
(3,4)
/HWR
(2)
/LWR
0.1U
C23
TP81
TP82
TP83
TP84
BR21
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
4
0.1U
C24
R384
R12
R8
X1
AT-49
19.6608MHz
R4
33J
22J
12P
CPUCLK#
/RESET1
EXTAL
NM
C6
XTAL
NM
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)
BR24
8
7 33JX4
6
5
33P
MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-M200/M201)
0.1U
C25
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
A0
A1
A2
A3
C12
22P
CPUCLK
TP19
C70
NM
/STBY
NMI
1
2
3
4
C14
NM
EXTAL
XTAL
TP20
TP21
B
A20
TP85
TP86
TP87
TP88
TP89
TP90
TP91
TP92
BR22
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
TP101
TP102
TP103
33J
TP93
TP94
TP95
TP96
TP97
TP98
TP99
TP100
BR23
8
7 33JX4
6
5
BR25
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 21
R50
C8
C15
NM
/WDTOVF
TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP34
TP35
TP36
TP105
TP106
C7
C13
NM
TP37
C
P60
A[20..0]
H8S/2321
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
/CS5#
P35/SCK1
P34/SCK0
P33/RxD1
P32/RxD0
P31/TxD1
P30/TxD0
VCC
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
Vss
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
Vss
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VCC
C
(3)
(5)
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
P53/ADTRG
P52/SCK2
Vss
Vss
P51/RxD2
P50/TxD2
PF0/BREQ
PF1/BACK
PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
PF7/0
Vss
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3
P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5
P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1
P61/TEND0/CS5
Vss
Vss
P60/DREQ0/CS4
Vss
PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0
Vss
NC
VCC
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
Vss
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9
PB2/A10
PB3/A11
Vss
PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
Vss
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
Vss
Vss
P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
TP107
TP108
(2,3,4)
TP72
TP73
TP75
TP77
TP57
TP59
TP61
TP63
TP65
TP67
TP69
TP71
TP50
TP52
TP54
TP55
TP47
TP41
TP43
TP38
CPU3.3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)
/RES_NIC
33J
33J
1KJ
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
R78
R364
R22
DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
BR18
8
7 33JX4
6
5
(2)
(5,9)
(2)
(5)
(2,5)
(8)
(8)
8 BR19
7 33JX4
6
5
8 BR17
7 33JX4
6
5
DMT0
(7)
DMT1
(7)
DMT2
(7)
DMT3
(7)
MMCLK
(6)
RESETOUT1 (5)
/RES_NIC (15)
BZR
(11)
CRUMSCL
(16)
CRUMSDA (16)
/CS5
(13)
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
mt_at_home#
CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)
8 BR16
7 33JX4
6
5
C369
NM
C10
NM
A
D3
D2
D1
D0
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D15
D14
D13
D12
RSV_IN0
D
SCL
RxD
SDA
TXD
POFF
D
D[15..0]
SCL
RxD
SDA
TxD
POFF
100P
100P
TP7
C4
C3
(2,3,4,13)
(4)
(12)
(4)
(12)
(6)
SPFMT0
SPFMT1
SPFMT2
SPFMT3
DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
/CS5#
10KJX4
BR12
10KJX4
BR11
/RES_FAX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
8
7
6
5
R95
R132
R131
R94
R66
R26
/RES_NIC
/RES_FAX
D3
D2
D1
D0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D11
D10
D9
D8
D15
D14
D13
D12
/RES_OA982
/RES_GASIC
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_USB20
/RES_FAX (13)
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
10KJ
10KJX4
BR6
R392
1
2
3
4
R11
/ES_SRDY
ES_CMD
ES_STS
R5
R9
10KJX4
BR1
P60
1
2
3
4
/PRINTST
/ES_PAGE
/STBY
NMI
/WDTOVF
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
NM_10KJX4
BR9
NM_10KJX4
BR7
10KJX4
BR4
10KJX4
BR2
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
E
E
10KJX4
BR5
10KJX4
BR3
R24
R53
R52
CRUMSDA
10KJX4
BR13
RxD
TxD
1
2
3
4
R21
R23
/SCANSP
/TRANSST
/SCANST
RY/BY
R19
10KJX4
BR10
SDA
SCL
4
3
2
1
R67
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
POFF
CPUCLK
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#
CCD_TG
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
/CS0#
/CS1#
/CS2#
/CS3#
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
8
7
6
5
2KJ
2KJ
10KJ
5
6
7
8
10KJ
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
1/16
VCC3
1
2
3
4
B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201)
VCC3
1
(4)
2
3
4
CCD_CP
AFE_SEN
ADCLK
AFE_SCK
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
10KJX4
8 RAMDB11
7 RAMDB10
6 RAMDB9
5 RAMDB8
BR53
1
2
3
4
PFCLKIN
PFCLKOUT
TP720
R68
R70
10KJX4
8 RAMDB15
7 RAMDB14
6 RAMDB13
5 RAMDB12
BR49
1
2
3
4
TP719
10KJX4
8 RAMDB3
7 RAMDB2
6 RAMDB1
5 RAMDB0
BR45
1
2
3
4
SDCLK
10KJX4
8 RAMDB7
7 RAMDB6
6 RAMDB5
5 RAMDB4
RAMDB[15..0]
MAD[12..0]
0J
0J
C74
NM
R59
33J
NM
10KJ
10KJ
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
C351
BR34
1
2
3
4
R45
R46
VCC3
AFE_SDI
AFE_DB7
8
AFE_DB6
7
AFE_DB5
6
AFE_DB4
5
10KJX4
AFE_DB3
8
AFE_DB2
7
AFE_DB1
6
AFE_DB0
5
10KJX4
10KJ AFE_SDI
BR41
1
2
3
4
(4)
(4)
1
2
3
4
BR31
1
2
3
4
BR33
R42
VCC3
(14) AFE_DB[7..0]
CCD_PHI2
CCD_PHI1
(5)
AFE_SDI
BSAMP
(5)
(5)
CCD_RS
(5)
TP866
TP867
TP868
TP869
RAMDB11
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB8
TP826
TP827
TP828
TP829
TP822
TP823
TP824
TP825
A
C108
12P
C107
10P
X5
AT-49(18.3856MHz)
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4
MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
TP862
TP863
TP864
TP865
RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12
DQM1
SDCKE
TP858
TP859
TP860
TP861
RAMDB3
RAMDB2
RAMDB1
RAMDB0
(4)
(4)
TP854
TP855
TP856
TP857
/SDRAS
/SDCAS
/SDWDE
DQM0
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4
BANK1
BANK0
/SDCS
(4)
(4)
(4)
TP821
MAD10
1
2
3
4
BR36
1
2
3
4
BR37
1
2
3
4
BR38
(1,3,4,13) D[15..0]
1
2
3
4
BR39
1
2
3
4
BR42
1
2
3
4
BR44
1
2
3
4
BR48
1
2
3
4
BR51
1
2
3
4
BR54
1
2
3
4
BR56
RAM_CLK_OUT
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
(7)
(7)
(7)
TP817
TP818
TP819
TP820
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
(7)
(7)
(7)
(6)
(6)
(6)
MAD3
MAD2
MAD1
MAD0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_AI0
CL
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
33JX4
33JX4
82JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM
(14)
TP848
TP847
TP846
TP845
C80
47P
SYNC#
TP746
TP238
TP239
TP241
TP233
TP235
TP228
TP229
TP231
TP225
TP220
TP222
TP209
TP211
TP213
TP214
TP216
TP218
TP205
TP206
TP196
TP198
TP200
TP202
TP188
TP190
TP192
TP193
TP184
TP186
TP174
TP176
TP178
TP180
TP181
TP167
TP169
TP171
TP163
TP165
TP147
TP149
TP151
TP152
TP154
TP156
TP158
TP160
TP142
TP143
TP145
BR32
10J
R69
8 33JX4
7
6
5
8 33JX4
7
6
5
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
(1,3,4)
B
(5)
MIRCNT
CPU_SYNC
ARB_INT
(/SYNC)
(5)
(1)
(1)
GND(CORE)
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
VCC(CORE)
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
GND(AC)
RAM_MAD3
RAM_MAD2
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD1
RAM_MAD0
RAM_MAD10
VCC(CORE)
RAM_BANKS1
RAM_BANKS0
RAM_CS
RAM_RAS
RAM_CAS
VCC(AC)
RAM_WDE
RAM_DQM0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA7
RAM_DATA6
RAM_DATA5
RAM_DATA4
GND(CORE)
RAM_DATA3
RAM_DATA2
RAM_DATA1
RAM_DATA0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA15
RAM_DATA14
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DATA13
RAM_DATA12
RAM_DATA11
RAM_DATA10
RAM_DATA9
RAM_DATA8
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DQM1
RAM_CKE
GND(AC)
RAM_CLK_OUT
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD12
RAM_MAD11
RAM_MAD9
VCC(CORE)
RAM_MAD8
RAM_MAD7
VCC(AC)
RAM_MAD6
RAM_MAD5
RAM_MAD4
GND(AC)
CPUDATA15
CPUDATA14
CPUDATA13
CPUDATA12
CPUDATA11
CPUDATA10
CPUDATA9
CPUDATA8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TP747
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
IC4
TP844
TP843
TP842
TP841
R41
TP877
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB0
R39
TP876
AFE_DB7
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4
R38
TP836
C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68
R37
TP873
BR30
R36
TP875
R34
TP874
R35
R33
TP835
TP834
R32
D7
D6
D5
D4
(5)
R31
TP878
TP110
TP879
10KJX4
5
6
7
8
BR27
4
3
2
1
JTG_TCK
JTG_TMS
JTG_TDI
JTG_TDO
/RESET0
(4,5,9,12)
10KJ
R40
10KJX4
5
6
7
8
BR26
4
3
2
1
/OUTCS
C
TP495
TP493
TP490
VCC3
/PCLPRO
/FAXPRO
/OUTACK
/INREQ
TP630
TP628
TP627
CCD_TG
TP111
TP112
TP113
TP114
TP115
TP116
TP117
TP118
A[20..0]
D3
D2
D1
D0
HG73C141HFV(LF)
ASIC
(1)
/RES_GASIC
(3,5) (/ASIC_RST)
(1)
/CSGASIC
(1)
/LWR
(1,3,4,5) /RD
R134
R133
TP881
TP872
TP727
NM
33J
(1,5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
1000P
C97
VIDEO#
/LEND
MMD
PMD
TC
GRIDL
TP486
TP471
TP468
C
(6)
MC
(6)
BIAS
(6) VFMCNT_12V
(6) VFM_24V
(9) /FPOFF
TP130
TP131
TP132
TP133
TP255
TP259
TP260
TP261
RSV_OUT0
RSV_OUT1
RSV_OUT2
TP882
8
7
6
5
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
TP144
TP146
TP248
TP249
TP250
TP240
TP242
TP243
TP244
TP245
TP246
TP247
TP232
TP234
TP236
TP237
TP230
TP221
TP223
TP224
TP226
TP227
FWREN
(5)
R73
NM
R75
NM
D
R79
0J
(9)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
(9)
(9)
(9)
(9)
(9)
/PIWR
/PIACK
/POACK
/PIREQ
(9)
/POREQ
PIDATA[7..0]
G3.3V
C411
0.1U
TP257
TP254
S0
S1
7
6
4
3
N.C.
GND
4
5
XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS
CY25814SC
VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1
1
8
5
2
SFCLK48B
SFCLK48A
TP891
TP885
R49
R48
E
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
BR60
1
2
3
4
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB
TP258
TP253
E
R65 33J
C375
X7
AT-49(12MHz)
C402
12P
12P
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
BR59
1
2
3
4
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
TP892
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
BR58
1
2
3
4
VCC3
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
BR55
1
2
3
4
BR52
1
2
3
4
VCC3
BR57
1
2
3
4
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
(1)
(1)
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
(1)
/PRINTST
/SCANST
R356
R357
R358
R359
(9)
/TRANSST
(9)
/SC_LINE
/PR_LINE
C401
10U/10V<2012>
C400
10U/10V<2012>
MEM_INT
CLKSW
/POREQ
/PIREQ
10J
10J
C399
10U/10V<2012>
C37
10U/10V<2012>
VCC3
2/16
L2
ZJSR5101-223TA
FB2
NM_0J <1608>
R63 NM_33J
SFCLK48
SFCLK48B
C77
NM_12P
SFCLK48A
R62
10KJ
TP743
(15)
(9)
R58
NM
VCC3
OUTPUT
PFCLK
VCC
10KJ
R47
PARAD[7..0]
VCC3
PODATA[7..0]
NM_SG8002DC(48MHz)
1
IC9
TP252
X2
R61
10KJ
R60
NM
TP251 8
R57
NM
C76
0.1U
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
VCC3
/INIT_I
/SLCTIN_I
/AUTOFD_I
/STB_I
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
R56
10KJ
VCC3
8
7
6
5
BR46 33JX4
PARAD0
8
PARAD1
7
PARAD2
6
PARAD3
5
8BR40 33JX4 PARAD4
PARAD5
7
PARAD6
6
PARAD7
5
BR43 33JX4
33J
/REV_O
8
/FAULT_O
7
/ACK_O
6
BUSY_O
5
PE_O
BR47 33JX4
33J
SLCT_O
VCC3
R314
0J
FB3
0J <1608>
(6)
(6)
(6)
(9)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(6)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(1)
R92
NM
S1
TP256
VCC3
VCC3
HL
PR
CPFS2
/IMC_READY
KEYSC3
KEYSC2
KEYSC1
SPFON
MIRON
MPFS
OP_LATCH
OP_DATA
TM
TM_
OP_CLK
/SCANSP
1
2
3
4
R55
SLCT
TP215
TP217
TP219
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB
R54
1
2
3
4
/REV
/FAULT
/ACK
BUSY
PE
TP207
TP208
TP210
TP212
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
8
7
6
5
BR35 33JX4
33J
/H_SYNC
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
PIDATA3
TP194
TP195
TP197
TP199
TP201
TP203
TP204
TP187
TP189
TP191
TP182
TP183
TP185
TP168
TP170
TP172
TP173
TP175
TP177
TP179
TP153
TP155
TP157
TP159
TP161
TP162
TP164
TP166
TP148
TP150
R44
1
2
3
4
TP141
G3.3V
CPFS1
(6)
MRPS3
(6)
MRPS2
(6)
MRPS1
(6)
LDEN
(6)
RRS
(6)
PTPULSE (6)
GASIC_READY (12)
/POREQ
VCC(AC)
/PIWT
/PIACK
GND(AC)
/POACK
/PIREQ
GND(CORE)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
VCC(CORE)
/TRANSST
/RECEPTST
/PRINTST
/SCANST
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
GND(CORE)
VPOUT
VMOUT
OEN
GND(AC)
SUSPEND
IE1284_PARAD0
IE1284_PARAD1
VCC(AC)
IE1284_PARAD2
IE1284_PARAD3
IE1284_PARAD4
IE1284_PARAD5
IE1284_PARAD6
IE1284_PARAD7
IE1284_REV
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_FAULT
IE1284_ACK
IE1284_BUSY
IE1284_PE
GND(CORE)
IE1284_SLCT
IE1284_INIT
IE1284_SLCTIN
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_AUTOFD
IE1284_STB
TSP_MODE
TSO0
/SCANSP
VCC(AC)
OPE_CLK
GND(AC)
OPE_LATCH
OPE_DATA
TM
/TM
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14B
OUTP13B
OUTP12B
OUTP11B
OUTP10B
OUTP09B
OUTP08B
GND(CORE)
OUTP07B
OUTP06B
OUTP05B
BR29 33JX4
1
2
3
4
BR28 33JX4
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
D
12P
C291
VSAMP
MEM_INT
12P
C292
(1,5)
A9
A8
A7
A6
12P
C293
(5)
TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124
TP125
TP126
TP127
TP128
TP129
RAM_CLK_OUT
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
12P
C294
33J
JTG_TDO
JTG_TDI
TP742
TP741
SFCLK48
12P
C295
R30
JTG_TMS
JTG_TCK
TP740
TP739
TP738
TP737
TP736
PFCLK
CLKSW
12P
C296
TP837
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRO
/PCLPRO
TP325
TP270
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
12P
C297
0.1U
0.1U
C48
B
TP507
TP500
TP498
SYNC#
12P
C298
0.1U
C27
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C49
C38
0.1U
C28
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C50
C39
C29
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C51
C40
C30
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C52
C41
C31
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C53
C42
C32
0.1U
0.1U
C43
C33
0.1U
0.1U
C35
0.1U
0.1U
C36
0.1U
C54
C44
C34
0.1U
C45
0.1U
C55
C46
0.1U
C56
C47
0.1U
C57
A
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TP134
TP135
TP136
TP137
TP138
TP139
TP364
TP351
TP140
TP462
TP403
TP402
TP382
TP120
TP119
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
0.1U
C69
MCU PWB (ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201)
C75
22000P
CLPWM
VCC(AC)
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
GND(AC)
AFESCK
VCC(CORE)
ADCLK
GND(CORE)
AFE_SEN
CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2
AFE_SDI
CCD_CP
BSAMP
CCD_RS
CCD_TG
VSAMP
GND(CORE)
TD0
TDI
TRSK
TMS
TCK
VCC(CORE)
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRD
/PCLPRD
GND(AC)
MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13
VCC(CORE)
MDAT12
MDAT11
MDAT10
VCC(AC)
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
GND(CORE)
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04
VCC(CORE)
MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00
GND(AC)
/INCS
/INACK
/OUTREQ
GND(CORE)
/HSYNC
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
VCC(AC)
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
/POCS
CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4
VCC(AC)
CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0
GND(AC)
MIRCNT
/CPUSYNC
MEM_INT
ARB_INT
VCC(CORE)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5
GND(CORE)
RAM_CLK_IN
CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0
/CPUCS
SFCLK48
GND(CORE)
/CPUWR
/CPURD
/RESET
VCC(CORE)
PFCLK
CLKSW
GND(CORE)
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
TM2_15M
/SYNC
GND(AC)
/VIDEO
/LEND
VCC(AC)
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP07A
OUTP08A
GND(CORE)
OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14A
OUTP00B
GND(AC)
OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
VCC(AC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 22
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
A
(2,5) (/ASIC_RST)
(1) /RES_IOASIC
R135
33J
R136
NM
1000P
C98
A[20..0]
B
(1,2,4,13) D[15..0]
(1,2,4)
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
(1)
D13
D12
D11
D15
D14
CPUCLK#
/RD
/HWR
/CSIOASIC
(1,2,4,5)
(1,4)
(1)
(11)
KEYIN
TP635
TP294
TP296
TP285
TP287
TP282
IC52
(11)
(11)
(11)
IOIC3.3V
NM_10KJ
R706
MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
VDD
PHICLK
gnd
XCE0(PU50K)
CE1(PU50K)
XOE(PU50K)
XWR(PU50K)
A4(PU50K)
A3(PU50K)
A2(PU50K)
A1(PU50K)
A0(PU50K)
XRST(Sch)
vdd
D7(PU50K)
D6(PU50K)
SMC(SCAN)(PD50K)
SIN(SCAN)(PD50K)
SOUT(SCAN)
AMC(SCAN)(PD50K)
SCK(SCAN)
D5(PU50K)
D4(PU50K)
D3(PU50K)
VDD
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
C
TP262
TP263
TP264
TP265
TP266
TP267
TP268
TP269
TP636
SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100>
VDD
PORTE0(PD50K)
PORTE1(PD50K)
PORTE2(PD50K)
PORTE3(PD50K)
PORTE4(PD50K)
PORTE5(PD50K)
PORTE6(PD50K)
PORTE7(PD50K)
gnd
PORTD0(PD50K)
PORTD1(PD50K)
PORTD2(PD50K)
PORTD3(PD50K)
PORTD4(PD50K)
PORTD5(PD50K)
PORTD6(PD50K)
PORTD7(PD50K)
gnd
PORTC0(PD50K)
PORTC1(PD50K)
PORTC2(PD50K)
PORTC3(PD50K)
PORTC4(PD50K)
VDD
C
75
74 TP283
73 TP284
72 TP286
71 TP288
70 TP289
69 TP290
68 TP291
67 TP292
66
65 TP293
64 TP295
63
62 TP297
61 TP298
60 TP299
59 TP300
58 TP301
57
56 TP832
55 TP302
54 TP303
53 TP304
52 TP305
51
RSV_IN1
TP811
RSV_OUT17
RSV_OUT16
RSV_OUT15
RSV_OUT14
RSV_OUT13
RSV_OUT12
RSV_OUT11
RSV_OUT10
RSV_OUT9
RSV_OUT8
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(PPD3)
(POD)
(SPID)
(CED1)
(CED2)
(DRST)
D
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(13)
DSWS
(TCS)
DVS1
(PD1)
(PD2)
(SCOD)
(SRJD)
(MFD)
MSU_ST1
(11)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(6)
(PMRDY)
(MMLD)
(FANLK)
THOPEN
BL
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(6)
(RSV_SOL)
PSFM
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
/ES_CRDY
MCNT
(11)
(11)
(7)
(7)
INFOLED
PSL
SPUS
SRVC
SFTMT0
SFTMT1
SFTMT2
SFTMT3
IO ASIC
D
RSV_IN2
IOIC3.3V
LCDE
LCDRS
R707
4.7KJ
VCC3
/ES_CRDY
0.1U
C568
B
0.1U
C662
A
2
1
MSU_ST1
R10
4.7KJ
VCC3
0.1U
C575
TP271
TP272
TP273
TP274
D10
D9
D8
0.1U
C660
TP275
TP276
TP277
TP278
TP279
TP306
TP280
TP281
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
TP307
TP308
TP309
TP815
TP310
TP311
TP312
TP313
0.1U
C574
NM_10KJ
GND
YIN(PD50K)(5VFS)
SELC(OD,5VFS)
SELB(OD,5VFS)
SELA(OD,5VFS)
gnd
XCE_EXT
PORTG0(PD50K)
PORTG1(PD50K)
PORTG2(PD50K)
PORTG3(PD50K)
PORTG4(PD50K)
PORTG5(PD50K)
PORTG6(PD50K)
PORTG7(PD50K)
vdd
PORTF0(PD50K)
PORTF1(PD50K)
PORTF2(PD50K)
PORTF3(PD50K)
PORTF4(PD50K)
PORTF5(PD50K)
PORTF6(PD50K)
PORTF7(PD50K)
GND
0.1U
C569
R122
GND
D2(PU50K)
D1(PU50K)
D0(PU50K)
PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS)
vdd
PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTC7(PD50K)
PORTC6(PD50K)
PORTC5(PD50K)
GND
0.1U
C663
NM_10KJ
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
TP314
TP315
TP316
TP317
TP318
TP319
TP320
TP321
TP322
TP323
TP324
0.1U
C700
R263
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 23
E
E
C304
10U/10V<2012>
L15
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB13
0J <1608>
VCC3
3/16
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 24
1
2
3
R76
(1)
/CSSRAM
(1,2,3,5)
/RD
(1,3)
/HWR
A[20..0]
(1,2,3,13) D[15..0]
(1,2,3)
(1) SCL
(1) SDA
A
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
TP726
100J
NM
C352
4
B
5
28
12
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32
GND
GND
VDD
VDD
9
25
8
24
6
7
10
11
22
23
26
27
VCC3
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
C82
0.1U
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR
CS1
OE
WE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
IC8
VCC3
8
7
6
5
E0
E1
E2
VSS
0.1U
C84
1
2
3
4
0.1U
C85
VCC3 VCC3
CAT24WC08LI
VCC
WC
SCL
SDA
IC5
Serial EE-PROM
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
R77
NM
TP889
R74
10KJ
VCC3
B
A17
A1
A19
A18
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
(1,3)
/HWR
(2,5,9,12) /RESET0
(9)
VPP
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A20
R86
(1)
MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-M200/M201)
NM
C353
RY/BY
NM
TP353
TP355
TP357
TP359
TP361
TP363
TP365
TP366
TP368
TP344
TP346
TP347
TP326
TP328
TP330
TP331
TP333
TP335
TP337
TP339
TP341
VCC3
10KJ
NM
TP349
TP888
NM
R88
R81
NM
R82
NM
C86
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
(9)
A16
BYTE
GND
DQ15
DQ7
DQ14
DQ6
DQ13
DQ5
DQ12
DQ4
VCC
DQ11
DQ3
DQ10
DQ2
DQ9
DQ1
DQ8
DQ0
OE
GND
CE
A0
S29AL016D70TFI020
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A19
NC
WE
RP
VPP
WP
RY/BY
A18
A17
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
IC7
VPP
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
C
R84
10KJ
VCC3
TP367
TP369
TP348
TP350
TP352
TP354
TP356
TP358
TP360
TP362
TP332
TP334
TP336
TP338
TP340
TP342
TP343
TP345
TP327
TP329
C88
0.1U
VCC3
FlashROM VPP Controll
C
A17
NM
C354
R83
22000P
C87
NM
R80
NM
C355
J1,J2
A1
/RD
1
2
3
(1,2,3,5)
/CSFROM
D11
D3
D10
D2
D9
D1
D8
D0
D15
D7
D14
D6
D13
D5
D12
D4
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
MAD10
MAD0
MAD1
MAD2
MAD3
RAMDB7
RAMDB5
RAMDB6
RAMDB3
RAMDB4
RAMDB1
RAMDB2
RAMDB0
DQM0
/SDWDE
/SDCAS
/SDRAS
/SDCS
BANK0
BANK1
C89
0.1U
VCC3
TP850
TP849
TP813
TP840
TP838
TP853
TP839
VCC3
D
VSS
DQ15
VSSQ
DQ14
DQ13
VCCQ
DQ12
DQ11
VSSQ
DQ10
DQ9
VCCQ
DQ8
VSS
NC
UDQM
CLK
CLKE
NC
A11
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
VSS
C91
0.1U
C92
0.1U
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
VCC
DQ0
VCCQ
DQ1
DQ2
VSSQ
DQ3
DQ4
VCCQ
DQ5
DQ6
VSSQ
DQ7
VCC
LDQM
WE
CAS
RAS
CS
BA0
BA1
A10
A0
A1
A2
A3
VCC
IC6
C90
0.1U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
D
C93
0.1U
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
C94
0.1U
TP851
TP816
TP812
TP852
VCC3
C95
0.1U
C83
NM
DQM1
SDCLK
SDCKE
(2)
(2)
(2)
R85
RAMDB8
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB12
RAMDB11
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB15
0J
E
MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4
E
RAMDB[15..0]
(2)
MAD[12..0] (2)
4/16
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
C16
(2,3) (/ASIC_RST)
(1)
R64
RESETOUT1
1U<2012> 0.1U
C290
33J
1
2
CT
3
4
33J
A
C79
47P
TP395
R345
1KJ
OP Reset
R28
ASIC Reset
BU4212F
GND
VDD VOUT
IC3
Reset Circuit
R29
10KJ
VCC3
C26
47P
C18
NM
/OP_RST
TP386
0.01U
C17
TP786
R27
100KJ
VCC3
(9,10)
/ASIC_RST
TP383
(16)
/RESET0
(2,4,9,12)
(2,4,9,12) /RESET0
MIRCNT
AFE_SDI
AFE_SEN
AFE_SCK
(2)
(1,2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
VSAMP
CCD_TG
CCD_RS
BSAMP
CCD_CP
CCD_PHI1
CCD_PHI2
ADCLK
(9,10)
PB_NOE
(9,10) PB_NAE0
(9,10) PB_NWE
(1,2,3,4)
/RD
(2)
(2)
(2)
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
VIDEO#
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
TM
TM_
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1,2)
(1)
SPFMT0
(1)
SPFMT1
(1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(1)
SPFMT3
(2)
MIRON
(2)
SPFON
(2)
/ASIC_RST
/RESET#
(16)
R71
10KJ
R121
/OP_RST
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
OP_LATCH
(9,10)
(2)
(2)
(2)
B
100J
R72
10KJ
MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-M200/M201)
TP718
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
33P
3.3V
C117
TP378
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
IC23
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
TC74VHC244FT
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
NM_100J
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC26
74VHCT244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC20
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC16
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC13
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC19
R110
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
TP396
TP397
TP398
5V
TP384
TP385
TP387
TP388
TP389
TP390
TP391
TP900
TP899
TP898
TP897
TP896
TP895
TP894
TP893
TP412
TP413
TP414
TP415
TP416
TP417
TP418
TP419
R332
R333
R336
R338
R344
R354
R355
R360
FWREN
R226
NM_10KJ
R237
10KJ
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(/RD)
C
VSAMP#
33J
CCD_TG#
33J
CCD_RS#
33J
33J BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
33J
CCD_PHI1#
33J
CCD_PHI2#
33J
ADCLK#
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
4
3
2
1
TP833
AFE_SDI#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SCK#
R224
0J
VCC3
R373
R374
R375
R376
R223
NM_0J
100J
33JX4
BR61
5V
5
6
7
8
100J
33J
33J
33J
3.3V
33J
33J
33J
5V
R109
R101
R96
R97
R98
3.3V
R361
R370
R371
C110
0.1U
C127
0.1U
VCC3
(2)
TP404
TP405
TP406
TP407
TP408
TP409
TP410
TP411
VCC3
C128
0.1U
0.1U
C105
VCC3
TP370
TP371
TP372
TP373
TP374
TP375
TP379
TP380
VCC3
C
C255
0.1U
NM
C104
4
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
NM_TC7SH32FU
IC46
VSAMP#
CCD_TG#
CCD_RS#
BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
ADCLK#
2
1
(13)
(13)
(13)
(13)
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(/RD)
VCC3
(14)
(14)
(14)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
LCDDB4#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#
LCDE#
LCDRS#
AFE_SDI#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SCK#
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(7)
(7)
/VIDEO
(KEYSC1)
(KEYSC2)
(KEYSC3)
(TM)
(TM_)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
R119
R120
(2,3)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(13)
(15)
(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT3)
(/ASIC_RST)
(OP_CLK)
(OP_DATA)
(OP_LATCH)
/FAX_RST
/NIC_RST
1KJ
33J
TP814
C116
NM
C120
NM
C121
NM
C122
NM
C123
NM
C124
NM
C125
NM
C126
NM
/RESET1
ADCLK#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_CP#
BSAMP#
CCD_RS#
CCD_TG#
VSAMP#
/RESET#
0.01U
C310
B
0.1U
C114
0.1U
C115
NM
C311
A
5
3
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 25
(1)
(11)
/SYNC
D
FW
R93
10KJ
C306
NM
C307
NM
C308
NM
C309
NM
C129
NM
C130
NM
C131
NM
NM
C376
VCC3
(14) mt_at_home
(11)
D
R89
NM
(/RD)
(PB_NWE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NOE)
AFE_SCK#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SDI#
5V
3
1
47P
GND
Y2
GND
Y2
Y1
Vcc
2
4
6
5
TP394
0.1U
R100
3.3V
0.1U
C96
TP377
VCC3
C103
VCC3
2
4
6
5
TP393
NC7WZ17
A2
Y1
NC7WZ17
A2
A1
IC11
A1
Vcc
3
TP381
IC14
1
TP376
C99
3.3V
5V
E
33J
R91
3.3V
E
33J
(FW)
(1,9)
mt_at_home#
(/SYNC)
5/16
(2)
(1)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PR
MM_Y1
MM_Y2
MM_Y3
PMD
PMCLK
LDEN
/LEND
R116
10KJ
(1) MMCLK
100J
R339
(2)
VFM_24V
(2) VFMCNT_12V
TP474
TP797
TP799
TP798
100J
10KJ
R268
PR#
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
A
TP475
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Q21
TP464
TP805
TP806
TP807
KRC102S
2
KRC102S
2
TP723
TP722
Q14
10KJ
R269
R418
NM_10KJ
KID65503F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G
R304
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IC27
R142
NM_10KJ
R414
NM_10KJ
VCC3
R419
NM_10KJ
VCC3
TP792
TP785
TP790
TP789
10KJ
R265
10KJ
R271
10KJ
R270
10KJ
R266
4
MC
BIAS
TC
GRIDL
MCNT
PSFM
1
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
3
3
TP467
MMref0
MMref1
MMref2
/PMD
PMCLK_A
/LDEN
CPFS1
CPFS2
MPFS
RRS
R395 1.5KJ
R396 1.5KJ
1
2
(7)
(7)
(7)
(11)
(11)
(11)
Q16
R379
R380
Q17
KRC102S
2
2
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Q4
(12)
D45
1SS355
3
TP466
INT24V
3
3
NM_1.5KJ
NM_1.5KJ
1.5KJX4
8
7
6
5
3
PGND
TP429
D61
1SS355
/PR
SHOLD
TP801
TP800
TP795
TP793
TP794
PGND
TP437
TP439
TP440
TP441
TP442
TP445
TP446
24V
/PR
TP455
TP449
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
MMD
MRPS1
MRPS2
MRPS3
POFF
HL
FTH
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM
KID65001AF
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E
IC25
KRC102S
R117
10KJ
Q20
KRA119S
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BR62
1
2
3
4
KRC102S
2
/MMCLK
TP784
TP781
PGND
1.5KJX4
TP420
8
TP421
7
TP422
6
TP423
5
TP426
TP428
TP435
1
1
B
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM
(11)
B
(11)
R296
10KJ
PGND
KID65001AF
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E
R90
10KJ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IC21
R386
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TP430
47KJ
R363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
KID65503F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G
IC24
R389
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TP461
TP802
TP803
TP804
D58
B
D56
CRH01
/MMD
MRPS_1
MRPS_2
MRPS_3
/POFF
TP457
12V
(12)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(11)
0603SFF150FM/32-2
Q13
2SB1132
TP454
CP17
CRH01
D55
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24V
R413
NM_10KJ
1SS355
(12)
2
/VFMCNT
PSFMOUT
D51
CP16
5V
PGND
Q12
2SB1132
TP451
47KJ
B
RLS-73
TP456
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
R387
D57
RLS-73
TP450
TP448
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
Q7
KTA1505S
47KJ
/CPFS1
/CPFS2
/MPFS
/RRS
R388
TP447
D52
MTZ J22B
TP443
24V
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(12)
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
R362
/MC
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MCNT
24V
E
C
3
C
1SS355
D5
TP459
INT5V
R298
1.5KF
24V
HLOUT
TP431
(11)
Q2
NM_KTA1505S
R297
47KJ
R115
100J1/4W<3216>
TP460
TP444
NM_47KJ
R108
PTPULSE
NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
Q3
KRA119S
(12)
R112
(2)
C
6
5
PGND
EN5V
-
+
2
TP470
(12)
KIA358F-EL/P
7
IC45B
VFMOUT
D36
1SS355
TP432
1SS355
D4
1U<2012>
C312
Q18
KRC102S
3
NM
R368
LCDCONT
R316
NM
VCC3
12KF
R264
(16)
D
TCS_AN
R129
NM
MA700
D1
5V
2
1
R378
0J
R103
1MF
VCC3
R302
10KJ
2
1
VCC3
2
1
5V
R366 0J
NM_KDS226
D59
R307
7.5KF
TP469
3
-
+
12V
1
TP463
TP458
R107
4.3KF
TP436
VCC3
-
+
-
+
12V
+
-
5
6
+
-
3
2
12V
+
-
5
6
1
TP472
R393
0J
7
IC22B
KIA393F
TP465
KIA358F-EL/P
7
IC53B
0.1U
C305
EN5V
TP473
R381
NM
10KJ
R382
3
Q15
TP553
VCC3
2
0.1U
C113
E
NM
C371
NM_KDS226
2
1
VCC3
TP476
0.1U
C398
NM_2SB1197K
D60
R383
NM
B
2
1
R114
100J
1
VCC3
E
KDS226
D3
KDS226
D67
R394
NM
3
C407
NM
22000P
C119
R308
NM
3
PR#
0.1U/50V<1608>
R124
4.7KJ
VCC3
TP453
C118
R113
300J
0.1U/50V<1608>
C111
KIA358F-EL/P
12V
1
12V
Q19
2SK3018
R105
1KJ
VCC3
(S)
(D)
TP452
IC53A
1
IC22A
KIA393F
(G)
KIA358F-EL/P
IC45A
EN5V
2
3
12V
12V
2
3
C379
0.1U
TP427
R303
10KJ
IC17A
KIA393F
R104
7.5KF
VCC3
12V
NM_KDS226
D66
R123
10KF
R118
1.2KF
3
2
3
VCC3
C112
22000P
NM_KDS226
D2
R106
10KF
TP438
R301
4.7KJ
TP433
R102
1KF
LCD Contrast Buffer
RTH_IN
C367
2.2U<2012>
TP425
R300
470KJ
Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer
(1)
(12)
3
TP424
R299
100J
VCC3
D
8
4
BR63
1
2
3
4
1
1
E
C
8
4
A
1
8
4
8
4
+
-
5
6
(TCS_AN)
(LCDCONT)
(11)
(1)
(3)
(1)
TP434
KIA393F
IC17B
7
THOPEN
RTH
FTH
12V
6/16
8
4
MCU PWB (Driver section 2) (AR-M200/M201)
8
4
8
4
8
4
E
C
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 26
1
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 27
1
2
3
4
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(TM)
(TM_)
(5)
MRPS_1
MRPS_2
MRPS_3
(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT3)
MMref0
MMref1
MMref2
OUT_AOUT_A+
OUT_B+
OUT_B-
(5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
B
R160
300J
R150
2KJ
A
R161
620J
R162
1.2KJ
PGND
C144
NM_10U/10V<2012>
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5V
TP478
VS
SENSE 1
COMP 1
OUT 1B
I01
GND
GND
I11
PHASE 1
VREF 1
RC 1
VSS
PGND
C138
0.1U
L6219DS
OUT 1A
OUT 2A
SENSE 2
COMP 2
OUT 2B
GND
GND
I02
I12
PHASE 2
VREF 2
RC 2
IC32
R158
1J 2W
5
1
9
2
Vs
N.C
OUT2
OUT1
Vref
TA7291AS
GND
IN2
IN1
Vcc
IC36
R312
0J <1608>
6
4
3
7
8
Vs
R149
30KJ
R164
4.7KJ
B
GND
OUT A
OUT A
OUT A/
OUT A/
OUT B
OUT B
OUT B/
OUT B/
PGND
STA7100M
Sense B
Sense A
Sync
REF
IN A
IN A/
IN B
IN B/
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
24VSCMT 5V
Tonner Motor Driver
PGND
R157
1J 2W
14
5
6
9
8
7
11
12
IC34
SPF Motor Driver
PGND
C145
0.1U/50V<1608>
5V
PGND
R309
NM_0J <1608>
0.1U
C141
R159
1.2KJ
PGND
5V
PGND
R148
30KJ
TP488
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_PH_B
C135
820P
TP489
(2)
(2)
(2)
TP483
R146
1.5KJ
PGND
C137
0.1U
R163
100J
R152
510J
10KJX4
BR66
R151
1KJ
5V
C134
820P
R147
1KJ
PGND
0.68J 1W
R144
Scanner Motor Driver
10
1
2
3
4
17
18
15
16
13
PGND
(2)
(2)
(2)
24VSPFMT
C136
820P
TP487
MM_AI1
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MCU PWB (Driver section 3) (AR-M200/M201)
A
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
SPMT_3
TMB_O
TMA_O
24V
(12)
(12)
+
(11)
(11)
(11)
SPMT_1
(11)
SPMT_2
PGND
SPMT_0
C133
820P
0.68J 1W
C142
10U/35V
0.1U/50V<1608>
C143
TP481
R145
1.5KJ
R143
C139
47U/35V
PGND
+
24V
C
C140
0.1U/50V
<1608>
C
24VSFTMT
CP6
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VSPFSOL
CP5
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VDupMT
CP3
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VSPFMT
CP2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VSCMT
CP1
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(3)
(3)
(3)
SPUS
SRVC
(RSV_SOL)
TP503
TP502
TP501
D
PGND
1.2KJ
R404
1.2KJ
R403
NM_1.2KJ
R275
PGND
TP499
TP496
TP497
TP494
TP491
TP492
PGND
TP485
TP482
TP484
TP480
TP477
TP479
R408
10KJ
R407
10KJ
TP506
17
18
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
8
16
9
7
2
IC33
O4
O3
O2
O1
COM
COM
TD62064AF
GND
GND
I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC
1
8
16
9
7
2
D41
D42
D43
1SS355 1SS355 1SS355
Q23
2SD1781K
Q24
2SD1781K
Q25
NM_2SD1781K
TP505
R406
NM_10KJ
TP504
O4
O3
O2
O1
COM
COM
TD62064AF
GND
GND
I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC
IC31
/SPUS
/SRVC
MTZ J22B
D9
/SFTMT3
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT0
MTZ J22B
D8
/DMT3
/DMT2
/DMT1
/DMT0
E
(11)
(11)
(11)
E
24VSPFSOL
/RSV_SOL
Shifter Motor Driver
17
18
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Duplex Motor Driver
RSPF Solenoid Driver
SFTMT3
SFTMT2
(3)
SFTMT1
(3)
SFTMT0
DMT3
DMT2
DMT1
DMT0
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
D
24VSFTMT
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
24VDupMT
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
7/16
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 28
1
2
3
NM
C156
NM
C163
0.1U
C155
NM
C162
0.1U
(11)
C181
1000P
C180
1000P
12VIN
TP510
TP509
0.1U
C165
NM
C158
0.1U
C149
A
1000P
C182
TP511
R194
10J
0.1U
C166
NM
C159
NM
C150
47U/35V
C190
22U/16V
C204
47U/25V
C194
+
0.1U
C168
0.1U
C161
NM
C152
+
+
PGND
1000P
C183
TP512
R195
10J
0.1U
C167
0.1U
C160
NM
C151
L4
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB4
0J <1608>
R193
10J
0.1U
C164
NM
C157
0.1U
C148
R192
10J
VCC3
C147
24V
1000P
C185
TP514
R197
10J
NM
C170
NM
C154
12V
0.1U
C206
R127
100KJ
5V
R126
100KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>
C196
R125
100KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>
C191
1000P
C184
TP513
R196
10J
0.1U
C169
NM
C153
(11)
INT24V
B
3.3VIN
+
R203
0J
IN
IC37
3
C195
22U/16V
C205
22U/16V
+
+
2 KIA7805
GND
OUT
D25
1SS355
R204
0J
L5
ZJSR5101-223TA
FB5
NM_0J <1608>
47U/35V
C192
R206
100J 2W
R202
0J
0.1U
C207
0.1U
C197
0.1U
C193
R205
0J
TP518
0.1U
2
1
TP517
1
KDS226
D20
C179
3
5V
PGND
R179
1KJ 2W
INT24V
TP516
R187
2.7KJ
R186
20KJ
TP508
1SS355
D19
PGND
D14
1SS355
0.22J 2W
R175
TP515
R185
20KJ
(12) 24V1(DSWS)
1
0.1U
1
C146
1
4
1
VCC3
MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-M200/M201)
B
R130
100KJ
EN5V
R128
100KJ
VCC3
INT5V
DSWS
(3)
(16)
(16)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
R305
R306
(12)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(12)
C
(12)
(12)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(11)
(11)
MFD
MMLD
FANLK
PSFANLK
DVSEL
TCS
C
POD
PMRDY
SCOD
SPID
SRJD
PPD3
PD1
PD2
CED1
CED2
DRST
PPD1
PPD2
SPPD
PSW
D63
A
100J
100J
D62
UDZS3.9B
UDZS3.9B
2
1
2
1
2
1
KDS226
D21
KDS226
D15
KDS226
D10
5V
5V
2
1
2
1
2
1
KDS226
D30
KDS226
D26
KDS226
D23
VCC3
TP831
TP830
5V
5V
5V
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
KDS226
D31
KDS226
D27
KDS226
D24
KDS226
D22
KDS226
D16
KDS226
D11
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
KDS226
D54
KDS226
D37
KDS226
D17
KDS226
D12
KDS226
D28
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
3
3
2
1
2
1
D
1000P
C198
R207
15KJ
D
1000P
C199
1000P
C200
R209
4.7KJ
1000P
R208
15KJ
C187
R189
1KJ
1000P
3
3
C186
R188
1KJ
KDS226
D18
KDS226
D13
1000P
C201
R210
4.7KJ
1000P
C188
R190
15KJ
1000P
C171
R167
15KJ
R211
4.7KJ
1000P
C189
R191
4.7KJ
1000P
C172
R168
15KJ
2
1
VCC3
2
1
1000P
C372
R340
4.7KJ
KDS226
D32
KDS226
D29
1000P
C380
3
3
1000P
C174
R170
4.7KJ
R377
4.7KJ
VCC3
1000P
C173
R169
15KJ
R198
R199
R200
R201
R367
R372
1000P
C175
R171
4.7KJ
1000P
C202
R212
12KJ
1000P
C177
R173
15KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1000P
C203
R218
R219
R220
R214
R215
R216
R217
R213
3.3KJ
VCC3
1000P
C176
R172
4.7KJ
R183
R184
R176
R177
R178
R180
R181
R182
E
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
DVS1
(TCS)
(MFD)
(MMLD)
(FANLK)
(PSFANLK)
1000P
C178
R174
4.7KJ
VCC3
E
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(CED1)
(CED2)
(DRST)
(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(SPPD)
(PSW)
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(POD)
(PMRDY)
(SCOD)
(SPID)
(SRJD)
(PPD3)
(PD1)
(PD2)
8/16
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
1
2
3
4
1
2
R239
VCC3
R240
R241
R242
R243
R244
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
TRST_L
R137
33J
R138
NM
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
NM_10KJ
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0
(1) /RES_OA982
(5,10) /OP_RST
(2) PODATA[7..0]
/FPOFF
C216
NM
A
R342
R343
C100
1000P
(12)
PODATA7
PODATA6
PODATA5
PODATA4
PODATA3
PODATA2
PODATA1
PODATA0
10KJ
R238
(10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0]
/ES_PAGE
/ES_CRDY
/ES_SRDY
WAKEUP
(1)
(3)
(1)
(10)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(10)
(2)
(2)
C254
33P
R247
R248
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
TRST_L
VCC3
R245
R246
X4
AT-49(18.3856MHz)
R249
0J
4.7KJ
NM_0J
C252
33P
TRST_L
33JX4
R369
NM
XIN
XOUT
4.7KJ
4.7KJ
NM
NM
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
TP667
TP668
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
/FPOFF
33JX4
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
1
2
3
4
BR80 1
2
3
4
BR81
/POREQ
/POACK
/H_SYNC
/SC_LINE
INT_USBD
/PR_LINE
/FPOFF
(2) /IMC_READY
(13)
MDM_IRQ
(10) SUSPEND(USB2.0)
(12) OA982_READY
MODEM_IN
(FW)
DT_ACKB
DT_REQB
ES_CMD
ES_STS
BR78 1 33JX4
2
3
4
BR79 1
2
3
4
33JX4
PB_NWE
PB_NOE
PB_NCS3
PB_NAE0
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RY_BY
BR76 1 33JX4
2
3
4
BR77 1
2
3
4
33JX4
PB_NCS1
CLK_EXT
OA_RX
OA_TX
(13)
(1,5)
(10)
(10)
(1)
(1)
PB_ADDR0
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7
(5,10)
(5,10)
(10)
(5,10)
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
(13)
12P
C366
3
(10,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
RY_BY
12P
C362
10KJ
(12)
(12)
12P
C381
R351
PIDATA7
PIDATA6
PIDATA5
PIDATA4
PIDATA3
PIDATA2
PIDATA1
PIDATA0
/PIACK
/PIREQ
(2)
(2)
12P
C382
VCC3
PIDATA[7..0]
12P
C383
4
(2)
/PIWR
(2)
12P
C384
B
TP596
TP598
TP600
TP602
TP604
TP606
TP607
TP609
TP611
TP612
TP613
TP614
TP615
TP616
TP617
TP618
TP669
5
4
172
177
112
113
114
116
117
118
175
176
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
15
16
19
21
22
23
1
2
8
9
11
12
13
14
CLK_EXT
TP666
TP665
TP663
TP664
TP650
TP651
TP652
TP653
TP654
TP655
TP656
TP657
TP658
TP659
TP660
TP661
TP662
TP642
TP643
TP644
TP645
TP646
TP647
TP648
TP638
TP639
TP640
TP631
TP632
TP633
TP634
TP629
199
201
202
203
204
205
207
208
178
180
181
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
194
195
196
197
198
TP589
TP591
TP593
TP619
TP620
TP621
TP622
TP623
TP624
TP625
TP626
168
169
170
TP557
TP559
TP560
TP562
TP564
TP566
TP568
TP569
TP571
TP573
TP575
TP576
TP578
TP580
TP582
TP584
TP586
119
120
124
125
126
127
128
129
131
132
133
134
135
137
138
141
142
143
145
146
147
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167
TP519
TP521
TP523
TP525
TP527
TP529
TP531
TP533
TP535
TP537
TP539
TP541
TP543
TP545
TP547
TP549
TP551
CLK_EXT
OA-982
XIN
XOUT
TEST_MODE0
TEST_MODE1
RESET_L
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
TRST_L
USB_DM
USB_DP
B
R250
4.7KJ
PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK
PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS
PO_REQ/ANA_SD0
PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0
PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2
PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1
PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M
PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2
PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1
PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2
PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1
PO_DATA2/PLOAD
PO_DATA1/PCLK
PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C
GP_A0
GP_A1
GP_A2/DC_CHY1
GP_A3/DC_CHX1
GP_A4/DC_PWM1
GP_A5/DC_CHY0
GP_A6/DC_CHX0
GP_A7/DC_PWM0
GP_D0/ADC_A0
GP_D1/ADC_A1
GP_D2/ADC_A2
GP_D3/ADC_CLK
GP_D4/ADC_DATA
GP_D5/ADC_NCS
GP_B0/USART0_TX
GP_B1/USART0_RX
GP_B2/USART0_CK
GP_B3/ANA_SD1
GP_B4/DT_ACKB
GP_B5/DT_REQB
GP_B6/DT_ACKA
GP_B7/DT_REQA
GP_C0/PB_ADDR0
GP_C1/PB_ADDR1
GP_C2/PB_ADDR2
GP_C3/PB_ADDR3
GP_C4/PB_ADDR4
GP_C5/PB_ADDR5
GP_C6/PB_ADDR6
GP_C7/PB_ADDR7
REG_A9/PB_NCS1
REG_A8/PB_NCS2
REG_AD7/PB_DATA7
REG_AD6/PB_DATA6
REG_AD5/PB_DATA5
REG_AD4/PB_DATA4
REG_AD3/PB_DATA3
REG_AD2/PB_DATA2
REG_AD1/PB_DATA1
REG_AD0/PB_DATA0
REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0
REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3
REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0
REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1
REG_RDY/PB_NWE
INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE
BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1
CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2
MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0
PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX
PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX
PP_NINIT
PP_NFAULT
PP_NSELECTIN
PP_NAUTOFD
PP_SELECT
PP_PERROR
PP_BUSY
PP_NACK
PP_DATA7
PP_DATA6
PP_DATA5
PP_DATA4
PP_DATA3
PP_DATA2
PP_DATA1/USART1_CK
PP_DATA0
PP_NSTROBE
PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6
PI_TR_TGEN
PI_TGEN6
PI_TGEN5
PI_TGEN4
PI_TGEN3
PI_TGEN2
PI_TGEN1
PI_TGEN0
PI_DATA7
PI_DATA6
PI_DATA5
PI_DATA4
PI_DATA3
PI_DATA2
PI_DATA1
PI_DATA0
IC38
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
PLLSS_VSSA
PLLSS_VDDA
PLLCS_VSSA
PLLCS_VDDA
SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_CKE
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_CS1B_L
ROM_CS_L
SDRAM_DQMA0
SDRAM_DQMB0
SDRAM_DQMA1
SDRAM_DQMB1
SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_DATA12
SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_DATA14
SDRAM_DATA15
17
35
69
87
121
139
173
191
10
27
41
54
64
76
86
98
108
123
136
150
164
179
193
206
18
36
70
88
122
140
174
192
3
20
25
33
46
59
71
81
93
103
115
130
144
158
171
184
200
148
149
6
7
79
78
OA3.3V
OA3.3V
C214
0.01U
C212
0.01U
C240
0.1U
33J
TP610
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
C241
0.1U
C228
0.1U
C219
0.1U
C242
0.1U
C229
0.1U
C220
0.1U
C397
10U/10V<2012>
C215
1U<2012>
C227
0.1U
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
OA3.3V
R227
R228
R229
C213
1U<2012>
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
C218
0.1U
TP608
R234
SDRAM_CKE
TP577
BR72
TP579
TP581
TP583
TP585
BR73
TP587
TP588
TP590
TP592
BR74
TP594
TP595
TP597
TP599
BR75
TP601
TP603
TP605
100
99
97
96
95
94
92
91
90
89
85
82
80
84
83
TP570
TP572
TP574
111
110
101
1 BR71
2
3
4
1 BR67
2
3
4
1 BR68
2
3
4
1 BR69
2
3
4
1 BR70
2
3
4
R222
R390
R225
TP561
TP563
109
107
106
105
SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_CS1A_L
TP565
TP567
TP552
TP554
TP556
TP558
SDRAM_DQMA0
SDRAM_DQMB0
SDRAM_DQMA1
SDRAM_DQMB1
74
73
72
68
67
66
65
63
62
61
60
58
57
56
55
53
104
102
77
75
TP520
TP522
TP524
TP526
TP528
TP530
TP532
TP534
TP536
TP538
TP540
TP542
TP544
TP546
TP548
TP550
SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_DATA12
SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_DATA14
SDRAM_DATA15
C243
0.1U
C230
0.1U
C221
0.1U
C244
0.1U
C231
0.1U
C222
0.1U
C396
10U/10V<2012>
C211
NM
C
C245
0.1U
C232
0.1U
C223
0.1U
R235
R236
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
C246
0.1U
C233
0.1U
C224
0.1U
C226
0.1U
10KJX4
10KJX4
10KJX4
10KJX4
C251
NM
C253
47P
_SDRAM_CKE
C303
NM
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
VCC3
L6
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB6
0J <1608>
_SDRAM_CS0_L
_SDRAM_CS1A_L
BR82 1
2
3
4
BR83 1
2
3
4
BR84 1
2
3
4
BR85 1
2
3
4
C217
10U/10V<2012>
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
C247
0.1U
C234
0.1U
C225
0.1U
C395
10U/10V<2012>
OA3.3V
VCC3
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
_SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
_SDRAM_CLK
_SDRAM_CKE
TP730
TP731
TP732
TP733
33J
4.7KJ
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
ROM_CS_L
_SDRAM_CS0_L
_SDRAM_CS1A_L
_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMB0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
_SDRAM_DQMB1
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
8 33JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
C
NM
TP728
D
_SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
_SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
R232
VCC3
_SDRAM_DQMB0
_SDRAM_DQMB1
_SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
D
10KJ
MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2) (AR-M200/M201)
12P
C385
NM
R230
NM
R233
R231
22000P
C210
A
12P
C386
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 29
15
_SDRAM_DQMA1
_SDRAM_DQMA0
ROM_CS_L
RY_BY
C265
NM
_SDRAM_CLK
TP925
IC39
GND
GND
VCC
VCCW
IO0
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
IO6
IO7
IO8
IO9
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15/A-1
TP764
TP765
TP766
TP767
TP768
TP769
TP770
TP771
TP772
TP773
TP774
TP775
TP776
TP777
TP778
TP930
_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
TP926
_SDRAM_CKE
_SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
TP912
_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
TP791
_SDRAM_CKE
40
15
39
38
37
19
16
17
18
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
36
20
21
40
15
39
38
37
19
16
17
18
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
36
20
21
46
27
37
13
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
VCC3
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
HY57V561620FTP-H-C
N.C
LDQM
UDQM
CLK
CKE
CS
WE
CAS
RAS
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
BA0
BA1
IC44
54
41
28
52
46
12
6
27
14
1
49
43
9
3
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
54
41
28
52
46
12
6
27
14
1
49
43
9
3
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
C209
0.1U
10KJ
R346
VCC3
VCC3
E
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
VCC3
C300
0.1U
C235
0.1U
TP748
TP749
TP750
TP751
TP752
TP753
TP754
TP755
TP756
TP757
TP758
TP759
TP760
TP761
TP762
TP763
9/16
C256
0.1U
C299
0.1U
C248
0.1U
C236
0.1U
VPP
(4)
C250
0.1U
C238
0.1U
C263
0.1U
C302
0.1U
C264
0.1U
C301
0.1U
VCC3
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
C249
0.1U
C237
0.1U
VCC3
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
C208
NM
NM
R221
VCC3
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
TP809
TP810
TP901
TP902
TP909
TP910
TP911
SDRAM_ADDR0
HY57V561620FTP-H-C
N.C
LDQM
UDQM
CLK
CKE
CS
WE
CAS
RAS
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
BA0
BA1
IC40
8M/16M Flash ROM
BYTE
WP/ACC
RESET
RY/BY
WE
OE
CE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
_SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
C239
NM
_SDRAM_CLK
TP796
TP788
TP787
TP780
TP779
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
TP744
TP745
11
28
26
TP808
47
14
12
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
16
9
10
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
E
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
(9)
PB_NAE0
DT_ACKB
(5,9)
L7
C410
0.1U
BLM21PG600SN1
A
TP880
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
5
VCC3
IC183
TC7SH126FU
4
USB2.0 DEV1
SHIELD
GND
+D
-D
+5V
CN1
UBR23-4K2200
FG
100KJ
R399
(9)
C274
0.01U
DLW21SN900SQ2
TP908
VCC3
BLM21PG600SN1
L9
L8
R111
1MF
C271
0.1U
PB_NCS3
R267
NM_<1608>
C404
1U<2012>
TP907
GND
C270
0.1U
VCC3
C409
0.1U
C408
0.1U
(5,9) /OP_RST
1
3
B
TC7SH04FU
4
2
TC7SH08FU
IC43
FG
(1) /RES_USB20
4
IC42
5
VCC3
2
3
5
1
VCC3
12KF
R272
TP709
GND
L11
0J <1608>
TP708
TP703
R139
33J
R310
NM
R257
10KJ
R254
NM
VCC3
MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2) (AR-M200/M201)
B
NM
R273
(9,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
C101
1000P
TP706
TP705
(9)
WAKEUP
(9) SUSPEND(USB2.0)
VCC3
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
TP702
R260
10KJ
10KJ
R251
0.1U
10KJ
R401
10KJ
R252
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7
0J
R274
TP707
R261
10KJ
C266
0.1U
C257
0.01U
(9)
TP704
C268
0.1U
C259
0.01U
C
INT_USBD
10KJ
NM
DT_REQB
DT_ACKB
1.5KJ
R262
R258
R259
(9)
(9)
VCC3
C267
0.1U
C258
0.01U
C
(5,9)
(5,9)
TP683
TP685
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
R255
10KJ
VCC3
C269
0.1U
ISP33
C260
0.01U
ISP33
TP870
AGND
RPU
DP
DM
AGND
RREF
RESET_N
EOT
DREQ
DACK
DIOR
DIOW
DGND
INTRQ
READY/IORDY
INT
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
IC41
TP677
TP871
R253
1.2KJ
VCC3
C273
18P
TP783
AT-49(12MHz)
X6
C272
15P
GND
0.1U
C403
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
ISP1583BS
TP682
TP681
TP782
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
C406
10U/10V<2012>
D
TP675
TP701
TP695
TP694
TP693
TP692
TP691
TP690
TP689
TP688
TP687
TP686
TP684
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR0
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
R256
TP700
TP699
TP698
TP697
TP696
10KJ
VCC3
PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3
C262
0.1U
0J <1608>
TP670
L13
D
C261
10U/10V<2012>
ISP33
DATA10
DATA9
DATA8
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
VCC(I/O)
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
ALE/A0
DGND
MODE1
N.C.
SUSPEND
WAKEUP
BUS_CONF/DA0
VCC(3V3)
MODE0/DA1
DGND
XTAL1
XTAL2
VCC1V8
VBUS
VCC(I/O)
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11
DA2
CS_N
RW_N/RD_N
DS_N/WR_N
CS0_N
CS1_N
AD0
AD1
AD2
VCC(I/O)
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
VCC1V8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C405
10KJ
R400
DGND
DIE
A
1
0.1U
C370
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 30
(9,13)
E
PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13)
PB_ADDR[7:0]
10/16
E
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 31
1
2
3
To LD
A
(6)
(5)
(6)
/LDEN
/VIDEO
SHOLD
/SYNC
SPPD
(8)
(5)
SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
SPID
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(5)
(6)
5V
C275
0.1U/50V<1608>
EN5V
5V
1KJ
5V
3
KDS226
D65
2
1
24VSPFMT
INT5V
(6)
(8)
(6)
B
PGND
24V
(8)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A
B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN42
To LSU
SPPD
SPID
SPMT_3
SPMT_1
SPMT_2
SPMT_0
(8)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
(6)
(6)
5V
200J1/4W<3216>
5V
PGND
(7)
/SRVC
(7)
(7)
/SPUS
(8)
/RSV_SOL
(8)
SCOD
SRJD
NM_<1608>
24VSPFSOL
R347
To Polygon motor
B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
1
2
3
4
5
CN41
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
To RSPF unit
PGND
HLOUT
/POFF
24V
3.3VIN
CN30
PGND
(White)
24V
(6)
(6)
(8)
/TC
/MC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
5V
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
CN2
CN29
NM_<1608>
C276
24VSPFMT
To SPF unit
R282
R278
EN5V
5V
12VIN
FW
/PR
R140
/BIAS
/GRIDL
200J1/4W<3216>
INT24V
200J1/4W<3216>
(6)
(6)
200J1/4W<3216>
(3)
C
KEYIN
R277
C277
1000P
1KJ
R276
10KJ
5V
2
1
3
LCDDB4#
(5)
(5)
LCDRS#
LCDE#
LCDDB5#
(5)
(5)
LCDDB6#
(5)
LCDDB7#
INFOLED
BL
(3)
(3)
(5)
PSL
(3)
(6) (LCDCONT)
KDS226
D33
R290
R291
R292
R293
R294
100J
100P
C317
100J
100P
C347
100P
C349
(LCDRS)
(LCDE)
(LCDDB4)
100P
100J
100P
SELIN3
C359
(3)
C356
(LCDDB5)
100P
100J
100P
R328
C360
100J
C357
100J
D
SELIN2
R329
R330
100P
(3)
SELIN1
100P
(LCDDB6)
(3)
R365
100J
C361
100J
0J
0J
(LCDDB7)
R398
0J
R385
PSW
(OP_DATA)
(OP_CLK)
(OP_LATCH)
(5)
(LCDRS)
(LCDE)
(LCDDB4)
(LCDDB5)
(LCDDB6)
(LCDDB7)
DRST
(KEYSC3)
(KEYSC2)
(KEYSC1)
BZR
(8)
(5)
(5)
(8)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(1)
5V
C358
100J
NM
NM
R352
R331
R295
0J
0J
R350
R353
(SELIN1)
(SELIN2)
(SELIN3)
EN5V
To Operational PWB
NM
C363
NM
C365
4
INT5V
R349
NM
C364
D
CP10
To Power unit
R141
E
VCC3
1000P
C278
MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-M200/M201)
C
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP8
1000P
C279
B
E
0603SFF150FM/32-2
A
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP9
1000P
C280
(SELIN3)
(SELIN2)
(SELIN1)
FF4-32-S15D5
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN3
11/16
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
(6)
(8)
(6)
(6)
(8)
(6)
TMA_O
TMB_O
/SFTMT0
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT3
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
OUT_A+
OUT_B+
OUT_AOUT_B-
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
A
1000P
To Duplex motor
(White)
To Mirror motor
24VSFTMT
To Toner motor
To Shifter motor
(White)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN27
(White)
B2P-VH(LF)(SN)
1
2
CN25
(Red)
To VF Fan motor
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
CN16
(White)
B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
To Main motor
B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN20
PGND
PGND
CN22
24VDupMT
C286
1000P
1000P
1000P
C285
C282
C281
(7)
(7)
/DMT0
/DMT1
/DMT2
/DMT3
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
VFMOUT
FANLK
/VFMCNT
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK
1
2
3
4
5
B
(8)
(6)
(6)
PD1
POD
PPD1
CED1
/RRS
/CPFS1
24V1(DSWS)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
5V
5V
(Black)
To Paper pass detect
To Paper out detect
To Paper detect
(Green)
B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN28
(White)
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN26
R286
200J1/4W<3216>
(Red)
B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN24
To Cassette paper
solenoid
(Red)
To Cassette detect
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN21
(Blue)
C
To Interlock switch
B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
CN10
To Resist roller
solenoid
B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN18
(White)
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN15
R285
200J1/4W<3216>
24V
24V
PGND
0.1U/50V<1608>
CN12
0.1U/50V<1608>
C283
CP21
(8)
(8)
(8)
(6)
(6)
PD2
CED2
PPD3
PGND
/MCNT
MFD
(8)
/CPFS2
/MPFS
(6)
RTH_IN
(6)
5V
24V
24V
CN19
(Red)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
24V
(Red)
NM_B3B-PH-K-R
3
2
1
CN23
(White)
5V
PGND
VCC3
D
LT1P67A
D38
TP712
(2) GASIC_READY
To Mecha. COUNTER
B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
To Multi unit
To HL unit
B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN14
(White)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN11
To 2nd. cassette
R284
200J1/4W<3216>
PPD2
(8)
1000P
0J <1608>
1000P
C287
4
1000P
C288
C284
R283
200J1/4W<3216>
1/4W
NM_<1608>
5V
NM
C373
24V
C374
INT24V
390J
MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-M200/M201)
R287
C289
D
2
PSFMOUT
PSFANLK
VCC3
LED for Checker
(6)
(8)
NM_LT1P67A
Q9
NM_KRC106S
3
(White)
1
3
5
7
9
CN17
TP713
TP710
1000P
C368
2
2
4
6
8
10
VCC3
D40
E
NM_LT1P67A
Q10
NM_KRC106S
3
PGND
(White)
NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
3
2
1
CN35
TCK
/RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
OA_TX
OA_RX
VCC3
TCK
/RESET0
OA_TX
OA_RX
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
CN13
To PS Fan motor
(9) OA982_READY
D39
VCC3
(For debug)
12/16
OA982 JTAG & Serial
RxD
TxD
(9)
TRST_L
(9)
TMS
(9)
TDO
(9)
TDI
(9)
TCK
(2,4,5,9) /RESET0
(9)
OA_TX
(9)
OA_RX
(1)
(1)
E
CPU Serial
Not mounted
NM
C
R288
B
1
TP714
TP711
NM
A
1
R289
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 32
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 33
1
2
3
(1)
A
/CS5
TP725
100J
R391
NM
C378
(3)
(5)
/FAX_RST
MSU_ST1
(1) /RES_FAX
(9)
B
MDM_IRQ
R313
100J
R325
NM
2
1
KDS226
D47
2
1
VCC3
R311
1KJ
3
PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
MSU_ST1
D[15..0]
33JX4
C327
10KJ
C322
10KJ
C333
10KJ
C326
10KJ
33JX4
33JX4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
BR90
BR89
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
BR88
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
33JX4
C321
10KJ
C332
10KJ
BR92
C330
10KJ
C320
10KJ
R315
10KJ
VCC3
(1,2,3,4)
3
(9)
PB_NCS1
(5) (PB_NAE0)
(5) (PB_NWE)
(5) (PB_NOE)
KDS226
D46
(9)
MODEM_IN
(5) (/RD)
(MDM_IRQ)
1KJ
VCC3
R317
(9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0]
C102
0.1U
33JX4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
C
C334
NM
MCU_D7
MCU_D6
MCU_D5
MCU_D4
MCU_D3
MCU_D2
MCU_D1
MCU_D0
MODEM_IN
(/RD)
MCU_nCS
MCU_INT
PB_NCS1
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(PB_NOE)
(/FAX_RST)
#MDM_IRQ
#PB_ADDR7
#PB_ADDR6
#PB_ADDR5
#PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR3
#PB_ADDR2
#PB_ADDR1
#PB_ADDR0
#PB_DATA7
#PB_DATA6
#PB_DATA5
#PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA3
#PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA1
#PB_DATA0
CP11
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
(MDM_IRQ)
24V
0603SFF150FM/32-2
C323
NM
BR91
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
TP903
VCC3
CP13
C331
NM
0603SFF150FM/32-2
C324
NM
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
BR93
33JX4
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
C335
NM
4
L16
0J <1608>
C325
NM
(9,10) PB_DATA[7:0]
C328
NM
MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) (AR-M200/M201)
C336
NM
C
(/FAX_RST)
(PB_NWE)
PB_NCS1
#PB_ADDR1
#PB_ADDR3
#PB_ADDR5
#PB_ADDR7
#PB_DATA1
#PB_DATA3
#PB_DATA5
#PB_DATA7
MCU_nCS
MCU_D0
MCU_D2
MCU_D4
MCU_D6
MODEM_IN
C329
NM
B
C337
NM
A
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
D
B40B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
CN5
#MDM_IRQ
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
#PB_ADDR0
#PB_ADDR2
#PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR6
#PB_DATA0
#PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA6
MCU_INT
(/RD)
MCU_D1
MCU_D3
MCU_D5
MCU_D7
To Modem PWB
D
PGND
L14
0J <1608>
0603SFF150FM/32-2
TP904
EN5V
CP12
E
13/16
E
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 34
1
2
3
(2)
CL
A
33P
R323
15KJ
C341
R324
56KJ
C338
47U/35V
24V
+
R318
910J
1
3
Q5 2SJ537
PGND
Q6
KTC3198
CP18
0603SFF150FM/32-2
2
B
D49
11EQS06
TWKA-221K
L12
220UH
47U/35V
+ C339
Copy Lamp Inverter
R321
4
B
R319
15KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>
C340
MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)
A
5.6KJ1/4W<3216>
VCL
C
C
(5)
mt_at_home
R320
1KJ
1000P
C342
R322
12KJ
VCC3
2
1
KDS226
D48
3
D
D
AFE_SCK#
ADCLK#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_CP#
CCD_RS#
CCD_TG#
(2) AFE_DB[7..0]
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
VCL
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#6
PGND
CP14
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
0603SFF150FM/32-2
12V
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
BR87 33JX4
E
47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P
(5)
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7
VCL
VSAMP#
(5)
(5)
(5)
AFE_SDI#
BSAMP#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#7
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#3
L17
1J <1608>
C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
PGND
14/16
CP15
0603SFF150FM/32-2
TP886
EN5V
BR86 33JX4
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
FF4-32-S15D5
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
CN4
To Scanner unit
E
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 35
B
C
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
/ACK_O
BUSY_O
PE_O
SLCT_O
/FAULT_O
/STB_I
/AUTOFD_I
/SLCTIN_I
/INIT_I
/REV_O
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
/ACK_O
BUSY_O
PE_O
SLCT_O
/FAULT_O
/STB_I
/AUTOFD_I
/SLCTIN_I
/INIT_I
/REV_O
R402
NM
8
7
6
5
8 BR94 33JX4
7
6
5
BR95 33JX4
L19
0J <1608>
TP906
EN5V
D
24FMN-BTK-A
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN39
C346
0.1U
C345
0.1U
VCC3
To NIC PWB
0.1U
C343
0.1U
C344
EN5V
E
15/16
E
3
4
1
TP672
TP673
TP674
TP676
TP678
TP679
TP680
TP717
L18
0J <1608>
TP905
VCC3
D
1
A
C
2
PARAD[7..0]
0.1U
C106
0603SFF150FM/32-2
2
(2)
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
12P
C388
/NIC_RST
12P
C387
(5)
(1) /RES_NIC
12P
C389
R326
1KJ
R327
NM
12P
C391
3
12P
C390
4
12P
C392
MCU PWB (NIC I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)
12P
C393
CP19
B
CP20
A
12P
C394
0603SFF150FM/32-2
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 36
1
2
3
4
(1)
A
CRUMSCL
/ASIC_RST
(1) CRUMSDA
(5)
B
R337
3.3V
0J
3.3V
TP883
4
1
GND
B
Vcc
3
2
5
2
3
5
1
4
TC7SET08F
IC51
FB8
EN5V
TC7SBD385AFU
OE
A
IC49
FB9
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
R335
10KJ
TP887
TP884
B
F-GND 2
F-GND 1
5V
C348
0.1U
EN5V
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
0.1U
C350
R341
10KJ
TP715
R334
NM
VCC3
CRUM Control
(CRUMSCL)
(CRUMSDA)
5V
MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)
A
R348
FB10
24V
NM
2
4
6
8
10
R279
10J
EN5V
(White)
FB11
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
FB12
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
KDS226
D34
3
F-GND 5
F-GND 4
F-GND 3
2
1
(Red)
D
2
1
KDS226
D35
3
R281
R280
D
300J
300J
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
FB14
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
FB15
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
To DV Unit with CRUM
(To Analog Tonner Sensor)
To DV Unit
(To Analog Tonner Sensor)
NM_B4B-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
CN6
B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
1
3
5
7
9
CN7
24V
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
TP721
PGND
TCS
DVSEL
C
TCS_AN
(6)
(8)
(8)
C
F-GND 7
F-GND 6
E
E
16/16
1
2
3
4
1
2
CN304
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
DRST
5V
KIN2
PSW
ONL
PSL
D-GND
5VEN
OP-DATA
OP-LATCH
SELIN2
OP-CLK
SELIN1
OP-STB
SELIN3
KIN1
D-GND
A
18FMN-BMTTR-A-TB or IMSA-9619S-18C-TB
D-GND
DRST
S3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
CN303
+5V
2
D-GND
DRST
5V
PSW
KIN2
KIN1
OP-STB
OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
D-GND
5VEN
PSL
ONL
D-GND
TP1
1
1
22000PF
TP49
TP50
N.M.
C354
PSW
150J
R409
SW16
R410
R365
150J
SKQNABD010
5VEN
PSL
ONL
150J
g1
g2
R408
R429
1kJ
Q306
2SB1197K
3
TP46
TP47
TP48
C343
47uF/16V
TP3
R428
10kJ
R427
1kJ
Q304
2SB1197K
3
C342
TP2
R426
10kJ
R425
1kJ
2
e1
e2
e3
d1
d2
d3
IC304
D316
1SS133
D317
1SS133
B
D319
D312
D320
1SS133 1SS133 1SS133
D318
D315 1SS133 D314
1SS133
1SS133
D311
1SS133
R413
R416
b1
b2
b3
TP7
R368
150J
TP6
TP8
a1
a2
a3
TP9
R369
150J
+5V
R419
R417
1KJ
R415
510J
R414
1KJ
R339
1KJ
1KJ
510J
22000PF
TP40 C348
1KJ
TP41
D313
1SS133
R421
R418
+5V
200PF 200PF 200PF
200PF
C328
C344 C345
C346
c1
c2
c3
TP5
R367
150J
LC7935AN
R412
1.5KJ
R378
150J
TP42
TP43
TP44
TP45
R423
1.5KJ
+5V
R366
150J
R411
1.5KJ
150J
f1
f2
f3
TP10
SPFL
LED69
MPL
LED71
PE
LTL-1LHG-002A
1KJ
1KJ
N.M.
N.M.
C351 C353
TP55
TP56
TP57
TP52
TP54
TP39
LED73
ME
LED91
ZPL
LED70
DU21
LED76
RPL
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
JPL
LED68
CS1L
LED102
DPL
LED74
EXL
LED77
EXD
LED78
EXN
LED79
CS2L
LED80
DAA1
LED81
SCNL
LED92
TP12
LED89
SJAL
TP13
R371
150J
LED90
BPL
TP15
R372
150J
LED93
1ENR
TP16
R420
150J
LED94
TPL
TP17
R379
150J
TP18
LED95
3RE
TP19
R422
150J
LED96
2RE
+5V
0.1uF
N.M. C349
C352
0.1uF
C350
+5V
GND
VCC
Y
W
IC306
A
B
C
G
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
8
C
74HC151
GND
A
B
C
G
74HC151
TP53 IC305
6 W
D0
D1
5 Y
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
16 VCC
D7
8
16
5
TP51 6
TP38 TP37 TP36
TP35
11
10
9
7
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
TP66
TP67
TP68
TP69
TP70
TP71
4 TP58 R390
TP59R389
3
TP60R388
2
TP61R387
1
15 TP62R386
14 TP63R402
13 TP64R385
12 TP65R384
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
TP21
TP23 TP24
TP20
R373
150J
LED97
1RE
TP34 TP33 TP32
R383
R382
R381
R407
R380
R404
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
R375
150J
TP29 TP28
+5V
TP31 TP30
R430
DAA2
LED99
TP25 TP26 TP27
TP22
R374
150J
LED98
NOR
100J
IC304
R376
150J
LED101
2ENR
+5V
R377
150J
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LED67
TP11
R370
150J
LED75
AE
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LED60
DU22
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
NM_LTL-1LHEE-002A
/Q28
/Q29
15
g3
/Q21
/Q30
16
R424
10kJ
9
/Q24
LEDM
7
/Q22
VCC
63
1
c3
/Q26
/STROBE
51
3
+5V
2
d3
13
/Q27
BEO
49
LEDM
6
/Q25
/LATCH
50
Q305
2SB1197K
3
11
/Q23
S IN
30
c2
10
/Q11
CLOCK
64
d2
8
/Q9
S OUT
19
c1
42
/Q7
GND1
5
d1
TP14
40
/Q10
GND2
14
4
41
b3
38
g3
33
/Q3
GND3
35
e3
34
/Q4
GND4
44
e2
36
/Q5
GND5
62
e1
37
/Q6
b2
f3
43
/Q12
/Q32
18
R394
4.7KJ
C329
1000p
g2
R399
4.7KJ
C336
1000p
b1
f2
R406
4.7KJ
C332
1000p
45
g1
R397
4.7KJ
C330
1000p
f1
31
/Q1
39
/Q8
/Q31
17
/Q20
4
R398
4.7KJ
C338
1000p
32
/Q2
/Q19
3
/Q13
/Q18
2
R396
4.7KJ
C340
1000p
46
R395
4.7KJ
C331
1000p
a3
C333
1000p
a2
C347
1000p
a1
C334
1000p
OPE PWB (7SEG) (AR-203E/5420)
C337
1000p
12
C
C335
1000p
R403
4.7KJ
C339
1000p
/Q14
/Q17
1
47
/Q15
/Q16
48
R401
4.7KJ
R393
4.7KJ
R392
4.7KJ
R391
4.7KJ
R400
4.7KJ
R405
4.7KJ
C341
1000p
B
D
D
SW18
SKQNABD010
SW24
SKQNABD010
SW23
SKQNABD010
SW22
SKQNABD010
SW19
SKQNABD010
SW30
SKQNABD010
SW25
SKQNABD010
SW20
SKQNABD010
SW21
SKQNABD010
SW26
SKQNABD010
SW27
SKQNABD010
SW28
SKQNABD010
EXMODK
ZUPK
ZDWK
CRSK
BPK
10UPK
MAGK
SCNK
OLK
CLK
1UPK
CVOP
SW17
SKQNABD010
EXDWK
+5V
SW29
SKQNABD010
1
2
3
CN305
+5V
LED72
PML
LED61
ONLL
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
NM_ S3B-PH-K-R (RED)
470J
R363
EXUPK
470J
R364
DUPK
PSL
ONL
5VEN
R431
4.7KJ
C355
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 37
NM_1000p
A
E
E
1/1
1
2
3
4
C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 38
1
2
3
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
OP-CLK
A
Open
C308
2
KRC106S
Q302
1
3.3V
R324
0J
1
3
R323
10KJ
2
3
Q303
KRA225S
2
3.3V
2
3
TP1
R326
0J
Q305
KRA225S
R304
100J
R302
0.1u
C322
R325
0J
1
3
Q304
KRA225S
R303
TP11
TP13
4
5V
TP14
100J
100J
B
TP2
TP3
LTL-1LHG-002A
SCAN
LED306
LTL-1LHG-002A
PRINT
C306
C307
1000p 1000p open
C305
R305
0J
R306
OPEN
R327
820J
open
C323
TB62725AF
IC304
C
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LED310
LTL-1LHG-002A
BPL
LED309
OPEN
SJAL
LED303
RPL
TP4
LTL-1LHG-002A
SPFL
LED314
LTL-1LHEE-002A
HPL
LED304
FAX
LED305
LTL-1LHG-002A
CS2L
LED307
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LED308
CS1L
LED302
COPY
LED301
C
1
TP12
DATA1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
LCDDB[7..4]
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDDB7#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB4#
LCDE#
LCDRS#
D
D
PSL
LCDE
R333
LCDRS
LCDCONT
2
R328
10kJ
R332
R331
R330
R329
R334
R335
KRC106S
Q307
100J
C332
100p
C327
100p
C328
100p
C329
100p
C330
100p
C331
100p
OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section) (AR-M200/M201)
6
LCDE#
LCDDB4#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#
TP15
3
LCDRS#
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
0J
R301
E
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GPM181C0
GND
V5
VDD
RS
R/W
E
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
IC301
LTL-1LHG-002A
PSL
LED311
5VEN
1/3
To LCD
ZENER_3.3V
D304
R344
100J
E
470J
5VEN
0.1u
C338
B
5
16
/OUT0
2
TP5
VCC
7
/OUT1
TP6
S-IN
8
/OUT2
3
CLOCK
9
4
TP7
/OUT3
13
TP8
/LATCH
10
/OUT4
/ENABLE
11
/OUT5
14
TP9
S-OUT
15
TP10
/OUT6
R-EXT
12
/OUT7
GND
1
0.1u
C333
A
1
2
3
4
D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201)
1
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 39
1
2
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
5V
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
Open
Open
A
C310
C311
Open
C309
47pF
C315
Open
Open
Open
KEYIN
C320
C319
BZR
C318
2kJ
R346
3
2kJ
R347
4
B
0.1u
PSW
5V
0.1u
C312
C321
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
33J
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
KRC106S
R317
R316
R315
R318
R338
R337
R336
2
Q306
TP25
5V
16
8
16
5
6
8
6
4
5
B
Open
C304
74HC151
GND
VCC
Y
W
IC302
2
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
10kJ
A
B
C
G
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
74HC238
GND
G1
G2A
G2B
A
B
C
VCC
IC303
R339
TP16 1
TP17 2
TP18 3
TP24
3
BZ301
PS1720P02
1
SKQNABD010
PSW
TP34
TP35
TP36
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP19
KEY310
11
10
9
7
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
5VEN
R314
R313
R312
R311
R307
R308
R309
R310
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
1SS133
D303
1SS133
D302
1SS133
D301
OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section) (AR-M200/M201)
A
2kJ
R348
1
Open
C337
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC3
2kJ
R342
SKQNABD010
C
MENU
KEY324
SKQNABD010
LK
KEY325
SKQNABD010
ESRT
KEY321
C
Open
C335
2kJ
R341
F-KEYIN1
SKQNABD010
NM5K
KEY319
SKQNABD010
NM8K
KEY323
SKQNABD010
NM2K
KEY320
Open
C334
2kJ
R340
F-KEYIN2
SKQNABD010
NM3K
KEY317
SKQNABD010
CLK
KEY318
SKQNABD010
NM6K
KEY322
Open
C313
2kJ
R319
F-KEYIN3
SKQNABD010
ASTK
KEY308
SKQNABD010
NM0K
KEY309
SKQNABD010
RAT
KEY316
NM9K
KEY306
D
Open
C314
2kJ
R320
F-KEYIN4
SKQNABD010
CAK
KEY307
SKQNABD010
SHPK
KEY315
SKQNABD010
D
Open
C316
2kJ
R321
F-KEYIN5
SKQNABD010
EXP
KEY305
SKQNABD010
ENT
KEY313
SKQNABD010
RK
KEY314
Open
C317
2kJ
R322
F-KEYIN6
SKQNABD010
NM7K
KEY304
SKQNABD010
NM4K
KEY311
SKQNABD010
NM1K
KEY312
Open
C336
E
2kJ
R343
F-KEYIN7
SKQNABD010
2SIDE
KEY303
SKQNABD010
BPK
KEY302
SKQNABD010
MODK
KEY301
E
2/3
1
2
3
4
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
OP-LATCH
PSL
PSW
OP-DATA
OP-CLK
B
C302
47uF/16v
LCDDB[7..4]
0.1u
C325
C301
47uF/16v
0.1u
C326
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
C
BM15B-GHS-TBT
CN301
To FAX Key PWB
F-KEYSC3
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYIN7
F-KEYIN6
F-KEYIN5
F-KEYIN4
F-KEYIN2
F-KEYIN3
F-KEYIN1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
DATA1
D
S3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
CN303
DRST
E
To Drum Initial Detector
3/3
3
4
1
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
DRST
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
KEYIN
KEYSC3
KEYSC2
KEYSC1
BZR
LCDCONT
LCDRS
LCDE
0.1u
C324
5VEN
E
1
TP57
TP55
TP56
TP54
TP39
TP40
TP41
TP42
TP43
TP44
TP45
TP46
TP47
TP48
TP49
TP50
TP51
TP52
TP53
TP38
TP37
C303
47uF/16v
5V
D
2
32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB
CN302
3.3V
To MCU PWB
C
2
3
4
B
OPERATION PWB (Connector section) (AR-M200/M201)
A
Open
R352
[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD
PROCEDURES
2)
Select "Option" → "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.
3)
Set the serial number according to the following.
[Preparation]
Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit.
A USB port is required for the PC.
Create "MaintenanceTool" flooder in the PC, and copy the following
files to the folder.
Necessary for program download
• Maintenance.exe (← Tool program)
• ProcModelQ.fmt
• ProcModelQ.mdl
Driver
• Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista)
• Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000)
• Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE)
• Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE)
Download file
• Download file (extension .dwl)
Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in
which the maintenance program is included.
When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC,
do not put a long folder name in the absolute path.
[Example]
Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download
Proper case:
c:\MaintenanceTool
1. Initial setting
(Serial number setting procedures)
Product Code (P): Enter number (0 – 99)
Enter the product code of "3."
The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading.
Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again
when rebooting the program.
ID Code(I): Enter number (0 – 99)
Assign an individual code to each PC uses
"Maintenance.exe."
Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default
data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading
firmware only.
After completion setting, press [OK]/[ENTER] key.
1)
PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
4)
(Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected to the machine.)
2. Download procedures
1)
The serial number has been assigned.
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
2)
Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to
the USB port on the main unit without fail.
3)
PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 1
4)
PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program.
5)
PC side: When the integration maintenance program is
boosted and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the
bottom of display, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu
bar.
6)
8)
PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.
9)
PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is
performed automatically.
PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/
IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5)
again.)
10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message is displayed.
7)
PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the
main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download
DWL Data Area" in the sub trees.
Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data
write state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this
moment.
11) Main unit side: Wait until "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the
operation panel. When "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201), download
is completed.
Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB
cable.
12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON
the machine again.
Download is completed with the above procedures.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 2
Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB
cable again and select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu
bar of the integration maintenance program. Repeat the
above procedures from 5).
4)
PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on
the integration maintenance program.
5)
PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The
copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
6)
PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/
IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
* Inhibition during download (Important)
If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use
great care not to execute the following items during download.
• Never turn off the machine.
• Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).
* If the above inhibition item occurs during
downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.
1)
When "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed
for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, execute the
download procedure again.
2)
If "d" is not displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed
for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, turn OFF the
power and press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key
(
) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201)
and turn ON the power. Check that "d" is displayed (or
"DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on
the operation panel, and execute the download procedure
again.
If "d" is not still displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still
displayed for the AR-M200/M201), replace the MCU with a new
one.
3. Version acquisition procedures
1)
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the
main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key
(
) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201)
together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3)
PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 3
7)
PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the
main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version"
in the sub trees.
8)
Check that the following display is shown.
4)
PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program.
5)
PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The
copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the
display, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
6)
PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/
IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed.
• The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The
downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as
shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version".
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure
EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data
maintenance of EEPROM.
1)
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the
main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key
(
) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201)
together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3)
PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 4
7)
PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to
develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data
Area" in the sub trees.
5. Installing procedures
<USB integration maintenance program installation>
Driver installation is made on plug-and-play.
<Installation on Windows Vista>
1)
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
8)
2)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3)
The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select
[Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."
Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is
displayed. Press [Agree] button.
4)
9)
The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown.
Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.].
PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is
displayed.
With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed.
Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are
saved in a file with extension of .eep.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 5
5)
When the following display is shown, select [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
8)
The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool
driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button.
6)
The following display is shown.
9)
When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver
software anyway].
10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to
complete installation.
7)
Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the
maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] button.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 6
<Installation on Windows XP>
1)
5)
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
(Suppose that the driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3)
The following display is shown.
Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button.
Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next>
button.
4)
6)
Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance
tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.
7)
When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway]
button.
Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool
driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is
the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press
<Next> button to go to procedure 7).
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 7
8)
When the following display is shown, installation is completed.
5)
Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.
6)
Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the
folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press
<Next> button to go to procedure 9).
7)
Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.
Press <Finish> button.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the
integration maintenance program is completed.
<Installation on Windows 2000>
1)
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3)
Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and
press <Next> button.
4)
Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press
<Next> button.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 8
8)
Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK>
button.
<Installation on Windows Me>
1)
(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3)
The following display is shown on the PC side.
Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next>
button.
9)
Press <Next> button to start installation.
4)
Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes
the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location,
and press <Next> button.
If the search location does not include the maintenance tool
driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf).
(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.
Press <Finish> button.
11) Restart the PC.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the
integration maintenance program is completed.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 9
5)
Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button.
(Suppose that the driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
6)
Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next>
button.
7)
When the following display is shown, installation is completed.
Press <Finish> button.
8)
Restart the PC.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the
integration maintenance program is completed.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 10
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
a
Solder composition
Solder composition code
Sn-Ag-Cu
a
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
b
Sn-Zn-Bi
z
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
i
Sn-Cu-Ni
n
Sn-Ag-Sb
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
p
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD
When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish)
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
(For USA, CANADA)
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES"
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000,
Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Adobe®, the Adobe® logo, Acrobat®, the Adobe® PDF logo, and ReaderTM are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and other countries.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 April Printed in Japan